JP2016022137A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of inhibiting deterioration in game taste by executing novel control.SOLUTION: A game machine controls a second large winning hole 2006 to open for a short time across a plurality of times in one round, however, produces a jackpot in which a game ball is received in the second large winning hole 2006 to allow a player to acquire prize balls. Therefore, even when the second large winning hole 2006 is controlled in a short-time opening state, the player may acquire prize balls more than the number of shot game balls and further may acquire a large quantity of prize balls in the short time. Consequently, this configuration can improve the game taste even when the game turns out the jackpot where the second large winning hole 2006 is controlled in the short-time open state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 87

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, based on the fact that a game ball launched based on the player's operation has won a winning prize opening, the display displays a variable pattern on the display and stops the display on the display after a predetermined period. There is one that executes a big hit game when a symbol that is displayed and stopped and displayed on a display device becomes a specific display mode. In a big hit game, a round game that controls the opening and closing of the big prize opening is executed multiple times, and when a game ball enters the big prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to acquire a large amount of prize balls to the player Is possible. Some game machines of this type can execute a plurality of types of big hit games by changing the number of round games to be executed and the opening period of the big prize opening in the round game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131776

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, when the player's advantage level changes, such as the number of prize balls that can be acquired changes according to the type of jackpot game to be executed, a type of jackpot game with a high advantage level is executed In this case, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by obtaining more prize balls than the number of game balls to be fired, while when a big hit game with a low degree of advantage is executed, The player could be discouraged by being able to acquire fewer prize balls than the number of players, and there was a risk that the game interest would be reduced despite the fact that the game was a big hit game.

  In view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest by executing novel control.

In order to solve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a game ball, and enters a special gaming state in which a privilege is given to a player based on the fact that a predetermined winning condition is established. A gaming machine to control,
Opening / closing means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball launched by the launching means during the special game state can be received and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received;
Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the opening and closing means;
Even if the opening / closing means is controlled to be in the open state for an extremely short time, a profit generating means that makes it possible to acquire more game balls than the total number of game balls fired by the firing means, It is characterized by providing.
According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when the opening / closing means is controlled to be opened for an extremely short time when the special gaming state is entered, the number of gaming balls is larger than the total number of gaming balls launched by the launching means. In order to execute a novel control that makes it possible to acquire the player, even if the opening and closing means is controlled to the open state only for an extremely short time, the player can be discouraged, and the special gaming state If this happens, the decline in the entertainment interest can be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest by performing novel control as a special gaming state.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, abbreviate | omitting the left frame member, (b) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right production | presentation unit of FIG.42 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery device. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front structural member and table | surface unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked under the side unit in the front unit and on the side unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked under the side unit and on the side unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right side in a center accessory in a cross section. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit vicinity in a center accessory, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the movable production | reproduction unit after back under the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the movement production | reduction unit after back under the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the rear-under-back movable production unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after the rear-under-motion movable production unit. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit of the back back movable movable production | generation unit, and was seen from the front with the back back back 1st decoration body and the back back back 2nd decoration body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from back with the back bottom 1st decoration body and back back 2nd decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back lower back movable production | presentation unit from the front. (A) is a front view of the back-under-bottom movable production unit in a normal state, and (b) is a back view of the back-bottom back first decorative body and the back-bottom back second decorative body rotated together from the normal state. It is a front view of the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decoration surface of the lower back 2nd decoration body to the front, (c) is a front view of a back back back 1st decoration body and a back back back 2nd decoration body in the state of (b). It is a front view of the state moved to the moving end on the left side. FIG. 104D shows the state of FIG. 104 (c), in which the first rear decorative body and the second rear lower decorative body are rotated together so that the first decorative surface of the first rear decorative body faces the front. It is a front view of a state, and (e) is the state after (d), after rotating a back bottom first decorative body to open a back bottom back first decorative body and a back bottom back second decorative body, It is a front view of the state which turned the 2nd decoration surface of the 1st decoration body, and the 2nd decoration surface of the back bottom 2nd decoration body to the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the rear upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the state moved to the position of a right end, (c) is a front view shown in the state where the back upper left first decoration object and the back upper left second decoration object were developed from the state of (b) It is. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit from the back. (A) is a front view which shows a back left movable production | presentation unit in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows in the state which made the back left movable decoration body in a back left movable production | production unit project. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the movable production | reproduction unit on the back of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the movable production unit in the back on the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable production unit in the back upper part for every main composition, and was seen from the front, (b) FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper middle decoration body unit of the back middle movement effect unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper middle decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper interior decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper middle decorative body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of a back upper inside decorative body unit from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in (a). (A) is a front view of a back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and (b) shows a pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a state of being opened halfway outward. It is a front view, (c) is a front view showing the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a state of being fully opened outward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle drive unit of the back middle movable production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle drive unit of the back middle movement production unit from the back. is there. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper middle drive unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was decomposed | disassembled for every main structure, and was seen from the back It is a disassembled perspective view. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the rear upper middle rotary unit of the rear upper middle drive unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit from the rear. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back middle moving movable production | generation unit roughly from a front. (A) is a front view of the back middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back upper middle decorative body unit in the back upper middle movable effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | generation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movement production | presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled parts other than a back lower front decoration body unit, and was seen from the front, the back lower front movable production | production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled parts other than a back lower front decoration body unit, and was seen from the back lower front movable production | presentation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front decoration body unit of the back back front movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism in a back lower front movable production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of a decoration body unit raising / lowering mechanism when raising a back lower front decoration body unit, (b) expands and shows the site | part of a unit raising / lowering pin in (a). It is explanatory drawing, (c) is further explanatory drawing which expands (b) further, and shows the relationship between a unit raising / lowering pin and a raising / lowering slit. (A) It is a front view which shows a back lower front movable production | presentation unit in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front decoration body unit from the state of (a), (c ) Is a front view showing a state in which the back bottom front first decorative body of the back bottom front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). A game board showing the first decorative body behind the back and the second decorative body after the back in the normal position in the movable production unit after the back unit of the back unit, with the second decorative surface facing forward. It is a front view. The game area with the first decorative body and the second decorative body behind the back unit are closed and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body is directed to the front. Slided to approximately the center in the left-right direction, and the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit slid to approximately the center in the left-right direction within the game area It is a front view of the game board shown by. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the first decorative body after the back bottom of the movable production unit after back back is opened by rotating the hinge, and the second decorative surface of each of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body behind the back is front-facing. The second upper decorative body of the back upper left first decorative body and the second decorative member of the second upper decorative body of the back upper left decorative body It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing the front. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the first decorative body after the back bottom of the movable production unit after back back is opened by rotating the hinge, and the second decorative surface of each of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body behind the back is front-facing. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which turned to. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable production unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position of the right end in front view. Move the back upper middle decorative body unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit in the rear unit to the position of the descending end, and in the counterclockwise direction of the front view so that the rear upper middle decorative body unit extends diagonally downwardly to the left when viewed from the front It is a front view of the game board shown in the rotated state. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to the half-open intermediate open position. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and are slid to the fully opened position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back lower front decorative body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit is located at the rising end. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which rotated the hinges of the back lower front 1st decoration body from the state of FIG. 140, and was raised above the back lower front 2nd decoration body. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the effect pre-determination process, and (B) is a table about the details of the type of pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the notice determination process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production | presentation control process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the change production start process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the change production end process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the production contents of specific notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production content of an eight consecutive villa chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production content of an eight consecutive villa chance production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 142) housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and is discharged by the payout device 830. The upper full-ball path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full-discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. And a normal guide path that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank guideway that guides the game balls released from the full tank outlet to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3. And a lower full sphere path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes that are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper substrate box 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as an operator's finger when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a that extends in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size through which only one game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 vertically. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface in the left-right direction of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. FIG. The description will be given with reference. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock body 63 are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protrusion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66 a only contacts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk of being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, etc., has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a vertically long rectangle. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The door frame side is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front, and protrudes forward to be rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 that is attached to the center of the left and right sides of the front surface of 360 and bulges forward. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle body 502 and is attached to the handle body 502 and a handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A stop button that can be operated by a cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) that is attached in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and having the front side opened. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a ball entry. A switching mechanism that switches the game ball that has entered from the mouth 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the touch unit disassembled, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 39 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the lower right door production unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door production unit, and FIG. 43 (a) shows the lower right door production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from back. FIG. 44 is a DD cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 49A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit with the door lower right rotating body facing forward, and FIG. 49B is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing rear.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 53 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall structure of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to be transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and is open on the upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving part 230c is formed in the shape of a pyramid cylinder so that it may narrow as it goes below (refer FIG. 41). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, and an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from above. A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled, and the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, the rendering operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, because the post-upper decoration board 235 for emitting and decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends leftward and rightward, and the center of the left and right bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, Detection sensor 278, and a door bottom right base decorated substrate 280 door bottom right relay board 281 that relays the connection between the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 and the peripheral control board 1510 and later, and.

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. And a heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 49B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The production unit cover 300 has a translucent shape as a whole with a container shape opened at the rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[3-1h. Upper dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 50B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by slider support portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in a position where the opening 321a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projections 322a are released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220 near the right end in front view and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card are returned after being drawn. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 and the like, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, because the post-upper decoration board 235 for emitting and decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed, and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the door frame foul cover unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 55A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 that is open on the front side. A flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view and passes through the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiving port 528 that opens toward the rear on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 in the front view and communicates with the full guide path 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 that are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front are released. And a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a plate-shaped movable piece 534 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, and a movable A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects the rotation of the piece 534 away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that biases the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 has a certain amount in the storage passage 533 when the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side. The number of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by a full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and urged to eliminate the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through ball passage 526, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway door member 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing section 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact section 537, the guide path door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 as viewed from the front, and a front-rear side of the launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side when viewed from the front. And the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the lower left side. And a circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front. And.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is attached to the rear end to be rotatable. The rear extension part 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and an upper hinge mounting portion 609 and a lower hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivoted to a position slightly below the left side of the front and right center of the game board mounting portion 602, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge main body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is passed through. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for axial support, and a door frame extending upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame lower hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of 3. .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. FIG. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the game ball driving strength changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 520 to the foul ball receiving port 530, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from behind. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled as the main structure. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 67 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 67 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 70A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and (b) is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of a payout blade in the payout device.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 75A is a perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75B is a perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 78 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is opened. . FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 for guiding the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank ball receiving port 530, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged in the body frame And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends passing through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827 is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c coincide with each other in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 825 are movable. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the single member 826 is detected by one single ball break detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece rear 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the ball break detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a can be changed depending on the weight of the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826 by its own weight and the weight. 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be obtained. Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude to the inside. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass through in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the bottom on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are paid. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game balls that have flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved forward and backward between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout vanes 839 are arranged at portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 contacts the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface bent in a square shape of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843c A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 71) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 71A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60B). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b is It is located directly under the ball outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower bulb guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 80).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and released downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e and sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full-ball path unit 850 automatically removes the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front and guiding it from the front end to the full tank reception port 530 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. The contact with the boss 867a protruding forward restricts the clockwise rotation.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the through ball path 526, the full tank reception port 530, and the door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is provided. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 78B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. A through ball passage 526 and a full tank reception port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has a larger number of game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 is provided. Game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. And when the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 by storing the game ball in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 relative to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In such a state, the number can be filled in the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage path 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, in a gaming state where a lot of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are released by the payout of the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and that houses a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls. A box 950.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the left front, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is a front view of the front structural member and the front unit in the game board cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 142) for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel Peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and the first special lottery result or the second start selected by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted either way according to the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls to the mouth 2004; Eteiru. The second big prize opening 2006 is composed of two big prize winning openings, a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls circulate (see FIG. 87).

  In addition, a count indicator 2007 is disposed in the lower center of the second big prize opening 2006 (see FIG. 87). This count indicator 2007 is described later within a certain period (for example, a period from the start to the end of one big hit game, a period during which probability improvement control is being executed, a period during which time-shortening control is being executed, etc.). The prize ball to which the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is paid out based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second upper prize opening sensor 2554 and the second lower prize opening sensor 2557. It controls to display the total number. In the count display 2007 of this example, the award that is paid out based on the fact that the second upper prize port sensor 2554 and the second lower major prize port sensor 2557 detect a game ball that has entered the second big prize port 2006. When the total number of spheres is updated, the minimum unit is incremented by one. Further, in this example, after the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554 and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557, the display on the count display 2007 is delayed by a certain period. Start updating (delay). In addition, when counting up the display on the count display 2007, the interval is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest interval at which a ball can be shot by the ball launcher 680, and one game ball is detected. The interval is such that “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls that can be acquired based on the above (15 in this case) is added. As described above, in the count display 2007 of this example, the display update is started with a delay from the detection of the incoming ball, and the update interval is relatively long. Therefore, the count display 2007 Updates are difficult to interrupt.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, which is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a. The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is a box-like box attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and opened forward, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end in front view in the back box 3010 and discharges a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500; It is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end of the lower right corner when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear box 3010 to be rotatable. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 accommodated in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 so that it can be detached from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of attachment holes and positioning holes for attaching the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding unit 1003 and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 85) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and 142. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has two LEDs based on a status indicator composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation display related to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for indicating the number of hold, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of change display has not yet been established, and the reception of a game ball to the first start opening 2002 (start winning prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by The first special symbol display that displays the LED in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is still a variation display By receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004 (occurrence of a start winning) by a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying a hold number that is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied. A second special that displays the eight special LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the lottery second special lottery result. Displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the variable display start condition has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 L The number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 when the second special holding number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result are “big hit” or the like And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 has a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 142) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (see FIG. 142). reference).

[5-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, the right fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixed piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. Is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and FIGS. 85 to 87. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the other one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. Of the plurality of general winning ports 2001 described above, the general winning port 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a is disposed immediately above the second starting port 2004. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed between the first starting port 2002 and the out port 1111. The second grand prize winning port 2006 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2002 in front of the first grand prize winning port 2005.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the second big prize opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is comprised by. In the second big prize opening 2006, the second upper big prize opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front of the game area 5a, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b is a front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a. Located on the left side below.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, which is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a. The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the front opening unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit as viewed from the rear. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starter unit 2100 has a first starter port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 is a rectangular unit base 2101 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left-right direction and has a first big winning port 2005 that penetrates back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper portion of the center in the left-right direction above the big prize opening 2005 and that forms the first starting port 2002, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, and the first starting port. A ball guiding portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with the same size as the first big prize opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first big prize opening door which are horizontally long and flat and are supported by the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the lower side is pivotable so that the first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 attached to the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize opening door member 2112, and a first case winning prize opening 2005 attached to the unit case 2111. A first grand prize opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball and a first attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111. The moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, the first big prize winning port sensor 2114 and the start port unit relay board 2115 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the lower part of the unit case 2111 are attached to the first big. And a starter unit decoration board (not shown) for decorating the winning opening 2005 with light emission.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open to the front with a size that allows a plurality of (for example, four to six) game balls to be received at a time.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be passed through and discharged downward. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided. When the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range on the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first start port 2002.

  In the start port unit 2100, the first big prize winning door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101 by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101. The first big prize opening 2005 is closed by being inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind. The first grand prize opening door member 2112 is mounted in an upright state in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. The first big prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state by rotating the head so as to move downward.

  The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state where the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. When the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the first big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first grand prize opening 2005 and contacts the first big prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game balls is changed from below by the inclination of the first big prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. The game balls received in the first grand prize opening 2005 are detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2114 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111.

[5-8b. Below the side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 89A is a perspective view of the front unit below the side unit and above the side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 89B is a perspective view of the side unit below and above the side unit as viewed from behind. The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001.

  The lower side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The rear part is open, and each of the three ball receiving parts 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 communicates with the rear end of the ball receiving part 2202 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. And a heel portion 2203 for guiding the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 backward.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. The three ball receivers 2202 protrude from the front surface of the unit base 2201 while being spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 is open upward with such a size that only one game ball can be received at a time.

  When the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the side unit upper 2300. The lower side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning ports 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1112 by the flanges 2203, respectively. The game ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 attached in the back left lower ball guiding unit 3505 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 125). Is detected and discharged downward.

[5-8c. On the side unit]
Next, the upper side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. In the gaming area 5a, the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front.

  The upper side unit 2300 includes a flat unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a shelf 2302 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extends to the left and right so that the right end side when viewed from the front is lowered. And. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end of the unit base 2301 to the right end.

  The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right by the shelf 2302. To the direction (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a).

[5-8d. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 92 is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right side in a center accessory in a cross section. Further, FIG. 93A is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 93B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG.

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is arranged above the start port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. it can. The center accessory 2500 has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006.

  The center accessory 2500 is a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening 1112 that penetrates largely at the center of the panel plate 1112, and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents entry of a game ball into the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 that is open at the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 so that a game ball in the game area 5a is open on the substantially central outer peripheral surface in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side when viewed from the front in the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and a game ball that has circulated through the warp passage 2521 can be released, and is directed rearward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 87) that is open and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 to the rear side of the flange portion 2511 and along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510 toward the center in the left-right direction The guiding path 2523 to be guided and the game ball guided by the guiding path 2523 can be supplied from the left end of the front view. And a stage 2530 that extends to the left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center portion of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction and rolls the supplied game ball in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. I have.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that both left and right ends of the front view are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is slightly increased. I'm out. In other words, the stage 2530 is formed in a gently inclined W shape. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a portion that is slightly higher corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a fan-shaped center guiding portion 2531 that is lowered toward the front and slightly widened to the left and right, and a center guiding portion 2531. The fan-shaped side guide portions 2532 that are formed at the two lowest portions on the left and right sides of the left and right sides and that are lowered toward the front and that extend to the left and right.

  In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp inlet 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 through the warp passage 2521, the warp outlet 2522, and the guide path 2523 is It is discharged forward from either the central guiding portion 2531 or the side guiding portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and returned to the gaming area 5a again (refluxed). In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 has the first start port 2002 located immediately below the central guide portion 2531. When the game ball is released from the central guide portion 2531 into the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is received with a very high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the center accessory 2500 has an upper right portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends substantially vertically downward from the right end in front view on the upper side of the center base 2510 to near the center in the vertical direction. The front peripheral wall so that the right end side is slightly lowered to the vicinity of the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000) in a state where the game board 5 is assembled from the lower end of the vertical wall part 2512a and the upper right vertical wall part 2512a. A right upper wall portion 2512b in which a portion of the portion 2512 extends rightward, and a right hanging wall portion in which a portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right horizontal wall portion to substantially the same height as the stage 2530. 2512c, and a right lower horizontal wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends leftward so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 on the outer peripheral side of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b, and an upper right circulation space 2541 in which a game ball can be circulated. A right flow passage 2542 through which the game ball can flow downward on the right side of the right lower hanging wall portion 2512c in communication with the distribution space 2541 and a right flow passage 2542, which is formed below the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d. A lower right circulation space 2543 that can be distributed and communicated with the game area 5a is provided. The upper right circulation space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right circulation space 2543 form a right hit game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size in which the vertical and horizontal dimensions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can flow down along a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end portion extending vertically downward extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the width in the left-right direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls can flow down in a line up and down.

  The lower right circulation space 2543 has a second attacker passage 2543a that opens to the left after extending to the left so that the left end side in front view is lowered from directly below the portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542, A discharge passage 2543b that communicates with the right end of the two attacker passages 2543a as viewed from the front and extends downward, and a lower end of the discharge passage 2543b that passes through the flange portion 2511 so that a game ball can pass therethrough and is opened rearward. A two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has a left and right dimension outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. When the lower right circulation space 2543 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543 a is on the left side when viewed from the front of the start port unit 2100. It opens toward the left at a height with respect to the winning opening 2005, and a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c opened at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being played.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 has an open front as a whole, and a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b at a substantially lower half portion in the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by a portion 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat transparent front right decorative plate 2544 extending forward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c to the right flow passage 2542, and the right flowing wall 2542 is behind the right hanging wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right circulation space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 extending forward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d, and the rear is the lower right lateral wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 and includes a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extending in a direction perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game balls. In the right flow path 2542, a plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546 protrude alternately at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 with respect to the direction in which the game balls flow. The plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542 have a distance between the speed reducing ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the right flow passage 2542 extending vertically, the game ball always flows in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to acceleration due to gravity.

  On the other hand, in the lower right circulation space 2543, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 protrude alternately at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 with respect to the game ball circulation direction. . The plurality of reduction ribs 2546 in the lower right circulation space 2543 are arranged such that the intervals between the reduction ribs 2546 are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball on the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side. Yes. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thus, even in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, and the circulation speed of the game balls is attenuated to prevent the circulation speed of the game balls from becoming too fast.

  In the present embodiment, the upper right circulation space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second start opening 2004, and the second large winning opening 2006 is provided in the lower right circulation space 2543. Is provided.

  Specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 that extends rightward in front view from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a, and one game ball is provided. It is formed so that it can pass only in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 that detects the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003. The gate part 2003 is arranged slightly to the left in front view with respect to the position immediately below the stop part 1006 of the front component member 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The general prize winning port 2001 and the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 that closes the lower half of the rear of the upper right circulation space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. Is provided. More specifically, the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened at the upper end, and immediately below the general winning opening 2001. And a ball receiving member 2548 formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens leftward on the left side when viewed from the front, and around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction by the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511. A second start port door member 2549 that is rotatably attached and closes the second start port 2004 so that it can be opened and closed, and a second start port door member 2549 that is attached to the rear surface of the flange portion 2511 is driven to open and close. A start opening solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 142), a second start opening sensor 2551 for detecting a game ball received in the second start opening 2004, It is equipped with a.

  The general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500 is opened to a size that can receive only one game ball in a right direction in front view with respect to a position directly below the gate portion 2003. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided rearward from the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center accessory 2500 to the right in the front view.

  The second start port 2004 is opened to the left in front view immediately below the general winning port 2001, and the second start port door member 2549 is rotated counterclockwise in front view to open to the left. As a result, game balls can be received. The second start-up door member 2549 has two outer sides whose outer shape in front view extends from the base circle constituting the lower portion and from one point outside the base circle to contact the base circle. Are formed in a so-called “droplet shape”, and are rotatably attached to the center of the base circle.

  In the normal state, the second start port 2004 is in a state where the start port solenoid 2550 is not energized, and the second start port door member 2549 is in an upright state where the distal end side is positioned substantially immediately above the base circle. The second start port door member 2549 is closed to prevent the game ball from being received. Then, when the start port solenoid 2550 is energized according to the normal lottery result lottered by passing the game ball through the gate 2003, the front end side of the second start port door member 2549 moves to the left in front view. In addition, the second start door member 2549 rotates and stops rotating with the tip end side being slightly higher. As a result, the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be received. Note that, in a state where the second start port door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second start port door member 2549 is substantially coincident with a vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, detected by the second start port sensor 2551, and discharged downward.

  The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right circulation space 2543 so as to open upward. More specifically, the second upper prize opening 2006a constituting the second big prize opening 2006 opens upward at the right end in front view in the second attacker passage 2543a. A second lower big prize opening 2006b constituting 2006 is open leftward and downward in the front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a in the second attacker passage 2543a. The second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are formed such that the left and right widths are in the range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The center accessory 2500 is supported by the center base 2510 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction so as to be able to open and close the second upper prize winning opening 2006a that opens upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The second upper prize winning opening 2006a is projected further forward and closed, and is attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and the flat second upper prize winning opening door member 2552 inclined so that the left end side in front view is lowered. A second upper attacker solenoid 2553 for opening and closing the second upper prize opening door member 2552, and a second upper prize opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second upper prize opening 2006a (FIG. 142). And the center base 2510 so as to open and close the second lower large prize opening 2006b that opens upward. A second plate-shaped second member that is supported so as to be slidable in the direction and projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 so as to close the second lower large prize opening 2006b, and is inclined so that the left end side in front view is lowered. The lower large prize opening door member 2555, the second lower attacker solenoid 2556 attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and driving the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 to open and close, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are received. And a second lower prize-winning sensor 2557 (see FIG. 142) for detecting a game ball.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction across the second upper major prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat crossing plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side is lower and forms part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and is A flat discharge plate portion 2559 that extends in the left-right direction so that the left end side is lowered from the left end in front view of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And. The crossing plate portion 2558 is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is in the range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The discharge plate portion 2559 is formed such that the left and right lengths are in the range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on the respective sides of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, they are lined up in the left-right direction at intervals slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game balls. It is installed. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 93, the first reduction rib 2546a, the second reduction rib 2546b, the third reduction rib 2546c, the fourth reduction rib 2546d, Ten deceleration ribs 2546, a fifth deceleration rib 2546e, a sixth deceleration rib 2546f, a seventh deceleration rib 2546g, an eighth deceleration rib 2546h, a ninth deceleration rib 2546i, and a tenth deceleration rib 2546j, are provided. An odd-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and an even-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper major prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end in front view of the second upper prize winning opening 2006a. The second speed reduction rib 2546b is disposed near the right end of the crossing plate portion 2558 on the left side of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize winning opening 2006a. The third reduction rib 2546c is disposed at the approximate center of the crossing plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is disposed in the vicinity of the left end of the crossing plate portion 2558 on the right side of the right end of the second lower large prize opening 2006b when viewed from the front. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is arranged on the left side of the right end of the second lower major prize opening 2006 when viewed from the front. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is disposed on the right side of the front center of the second lower prize winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction. The seventh deceleration rib 2546g is arranged on the left side of the second lower major prize opening 2006b at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is arranged on the right side of the left end of the second lower large prize winning opening 2006b when viewed from the front. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in front view of the second lower prize winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the discharge plate portion 2559.

  Of the first reduction rib 2546a to the tenth reduction rib 2546j, odd number reduction ribs 2546 from the first reduction rib 2546a to the ninth reduction rib 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 is provided with even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j. These even-numbered speed reduction ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 93 (a)).

  Of the even-numbered speed reduction ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second speed reduction ribs 2546b closest to the left end in front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b, and As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the eighth deceleration rib 2546h has a lower end at the bottom of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper prize port door member 2552, and the second lower prize port door member 2555). Is spaced apart from the lower ends of the other speed reduction ribs 2546 upward. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are the same distance as the approximate outer diameter of the game ball from the left end in front view of the second upper prize winning port 2006a and the second lower major prize winning port 2006b, respectively. , So as to be separated from each other.

  Thereby, when the second upper big prize opening 2006a or the second lower big prize opening 2006b shifts from the open state where the game ball can be received to the closed state where the game ball cannot be received, the second upper big prize port which slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower prize winning door member 2555, the left end in front view of the second upper prize winning opening 2006a or the left end in front view of the second lower prize winning opening 2006b, and the second deceleration rib 2546b Occurrence of clogging (ball biting) in which a game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h can be prevented.

  In the state in which the second upper prize port door member 2552 and the second lower prize port door member 2555 protrude forward and the second upper prize port 2006a and the second lower prize port 2006b are closed, A state in which the second upper prize port door member 2552 and the second lower prize port door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper prize port 2006a and the second lower major prize port 2006b; Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper prize port door member 2552 and the second lower prize port door member 2555 and the lower end of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls that are narrower than the second upper big prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 are circulated (rolled) over the upper surface of the second upper big prize opening door member 2555. A sufficient damping effect is maintained.

  The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and is located on the upper side of the front side wall portion 2512 from the substantially horizontal center in the left-right direction and to the right side when viewed from the front, and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5 a (the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000. ), A space having a width in which only one game ball can circulate is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right in front view rather than the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the center in the game area 5a A game ball can be distributed in the right hit game area 2540 on the right side of the accessory 2500 when viewed from the front.

  Further, in the assembled state on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the left and lower sides of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hit game area 2540. ing. Accordingly, the game balls that are driven into the game area 5a circulate downward through various routes by coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back after being disassembled as per the main configuration. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as seen from the back.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is a box-like box attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and opened forward, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end in front view in the back box 3010 and discharges a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500; It is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end of the lower right corner when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  One of the plurality of general prize opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right sphere passage unit 3030. The right sphere passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom of the back box 3010, and then the center in the left-right direction along the bottom. After being guided to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game ball received in the second big prize opening 2006 and the second out port 2543c of the center accessory 2500 to the left in front view along the bottom in the back box 3010, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010 onto the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back side of the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010a on the left side in the rear view, and is behind the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. An upper relay board 3040 that relays the connection to the upper left decorative board 3253, an upper relay board cover 3041 that is attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rear face of the back box 3010 A box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending to the left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and is accommodated in the effect drive board box 3042, and is received from the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor, decorative board, and the like based on the control command, and a rear view right on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay board 3044 that is attached to the corner and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and each winning hole sensor, each solenoid, and the like, and a rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay board cover 3045 attached thereto.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The back box 3010 has a box shape with an opening at the front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat-plate-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. Two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side in the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side when viewed from the back.

  The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100.

  The back box 3010 is not described in detail, but a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left middle decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is attached to the vicinity of the front end on the left side when viewed from the front in the back box 3010 and upward from the center in the vertical direction. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 has a light-transmitting unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration that is attached to the front of the unit base 3051 and imitating a “middle” of mahjong. A back left middle decorative body 3052 having translucency, a back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; It has.

  The back left center decoration unit 3050 can light up and decorate the back left center decoration body 3052 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back left center decoration board 3053 to emit light.

[5-9c. Moveable directing unit behind the back]
Next, the back and rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear movable movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the rear and lower back movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable production unit after the back bottom for each main configuration and is seen from the front, and FIG. 100 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable production unit after the back bottom for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the back-under-back movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back-bottom-back first decorative body and the back-bottom-back second decorative body, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back with the back bottom 1st decoration body and the back bottom back 2nd decoration body. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the drive system of the back and bottom movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the back-under-bottom movable production unit in the normal state, and FIG. 104 (b) is a state where the back-under-back first decorative body and the back-under-back second decorative body are rotated together from the normal state. It is a front view of the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decorative surface of the back back 2nd decoration body to the front, (c) is a back back back 1st decoration body and back back 2nd decoration body in the state of (b). It is a front view of the state which moved to the moving end of the left side of front view. Further, FIG. 105 (d) shows the first decorative surface of the first back and bottom decorative body by rotating the back and back first decorative body and the back and back second decorative body together in the state of FIG. 104 (c). It is a front view of the state which turned to the front, (e) rotates a back bottom back 1st decoration body from the state of (d), and opens a back bottom back 1st decoration body and a back bottom back 2nd decoration body It is a front view of the state which turned the 2nd decorative surface of the 1st decorative body after back and the 2nd decorative surface of the back 2nd decorative body to the front.

  The rear back movable movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 includes a back-under-bottom first decorative body 3110 that is supported so as to be hinge-rotating coaxially with respect to an axis extending vertically on one side extending vertically. The rear second decorative body 3120, the back lower back first decorative body and the back lower back second decorative body are attached so as to be able to rotate by hinges, and each of them can be rotationally driven separately, and the rotational drive unit 3130 Are slidably mounted in the left-right direction, and are provided with a slide unit 3150 that is mounted in the back box 3010, and a back bottom fixed decorative body 3160 that is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

  The first decorative body 3110 after the back is arranged so as to be opposite to each other, different decorations are formed from each other, and the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 having translucency, and the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 are supported so as to face each other, and a thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body main body 3113 and the first decorative body main body 3113 are attached to the display screen. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from the one decorative surface 3111 and the outer side from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 among the four sides extending vertically in the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body main body 3113 The first decorative body between the two first hinge portions 3115 that protrude to the top and can be supported so as to rotate about the axis extending vertically, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112. Body 3113 Attached first decorative substrate after under the back of a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides has (not shown) in which provided with a.

  The first decorative surface 3111 of the first backside decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from within the frame. On the second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back, a decoration with the left half portion of the character “holy” is formed. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect video) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The two first hinge portions 3115 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction and are attached coaxially. These first hinge portions 3115 are supported by the second hinge portion 3124 of the rear decorative second decorative body 3120 so that the hinges can rotate. The first decorative substrate after the back can make the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 illuminate and decorate by causing the LEDs on both sides to emit light appropriately.

  The back bottom second decorative body 3120 has a first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122 which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations and have translucency, and a first decorative surface. The 312 and the second decorative surface 3122 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body main body 3123 and the rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body main body 3123 extend vertically. One of the two sides protrudes outward from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 so as to rotate the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 below the back around the axis extending vertically. Three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are vertically spaced apart, and a decorative body that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124 A support shaft 3125; The second decorative body side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower surface of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125. The second detection piece 3128 extending in the direction, the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 are attached in the second decorative body 3123, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on both surfaces. And a second decorative substrate (not shown).

  On the first decorative surface 3121 of the second backside decorative body 3120 under the back, a decoration with a vertically written “Tenun” character is formed. On the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 behind the back, a decoration is formed in which the right half of the letter “holy” is applied. The second decorative body main body 3123 of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed to be approximately the same beam size as the first decorative body main body 3113 of the back lower back first decorative body 3110. That is, the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first backside decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the backside back second decorative body 3120 have outer dimensions. They are formed in approximately the same size.

  The three second hinge portions 3124 of the rear back second decorative body 3120 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction and are coaxially mounted, and the back bottom rear first decorative body is interposed between the second hinge portions 3124. The first hinge portions 3115 of 3110 are positioned and attached to each other so as to be rotatable. Thereby, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state where the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other by the hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface of each other. 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112, 3122 can be rotated (hinged) between the open states where they are substantially on the same surface. In the state in which the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 sandwich the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 from each other. The decorations of each of them will be integrated and the character of “Holy” will appear. The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are not shown in detail, but the first decorative surface 3111, the first backside rear decorative body 3110 and the backside rear second decorative body 3120, respectively. The decoration corresponding to the decoration applied to 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 is provided, and when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, The one hinge part 3115 and the second hinge part 3124 are made inconspicuous.

  The rotation support member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 for rotating the decoration support shaft 3125 to rotate the hinges of the back and back first decoration 3110 independent of the back and back second decoration 3120 at the upper end is rotatable. Inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed with a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. More specifically, the length is 80% to 90%. As a result, even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 is provided so that the heavy weight of the first decorative body 3110, which is heavy behind the back surface, is eccentric on one side extending vertically, the hinge can be rotated. The decorative body 3110 and the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made difficult to fall.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the second decorative body side operation gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a protruding from the gear teeth at one place on the outer periphery, and cannot be rotated once. The back bottom back second decorative board of the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 can make the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 illuminate by appropriately emitting light on both sides of the LED.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rear-under-back movable effect unit 3100 is a rotary drive unit base that is a box-shaped with the front side opened and rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 and is slidably attached to the slide unit 3150 in the left-right direction. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a that is rotatably supported by the rotation drive unit base 3131 and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a and below the back One of the connecting part 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over the outer periphery of the lower end of the sleeve part 3132a, and the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c. Having a first detection piece 3132d extending outward from the end. Includes a rotation transmitting member 3132 are, the.

  The rotation drive unit 3130 includes a spur gear-shaped first drive gear 3133 that meshes with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a back-under-behind first drive motor that rotates the first drive gear 3133. 3134, a first drive motor bracket 3135 mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and a second decorative body side operation gear 3126 of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are engaged. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3136, a back-under-back second drive motor 3137 for rotating the second drive gear 3136, and a back-under-back second drive motor 3137 are attached, and the rotary drive unit base 3131 is mounted. And a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

  Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 that is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 behind the back side.

  The rotation drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotation drive unit base 3131. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the back bottom rear first decorative board, the back bottom back second decorative board, the back bottom back first drive motor 3134, A rotary drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection of the back back second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, the second rotation detection sensor 3140, and the back bottom back relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. And more.

  The rotation drive unit 3130 includes a flat unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotation drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotation drive unit base 3131 and extends to the left and right, and a rack gear. And a rack member 3143 having a flat plate-like detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view of 3143a.

  The rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a main part 3131a in which the decorative body support shaft 3125, the back back first drive motor 3134, the back back rear second drive motor 3137, and the like are accommodated. And a sub-part 3131b which is arranged in a substantially cubic shape approximately half the height of the main part 3131a and which is arranged on the left side of the main part 3131a when viewed from the front, and accommodates the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. The main part 3131a and the sub part 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

  Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 includes a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131c and a lower bearing portion 3131d that are open at the front end side and are notched toward the rear, on the top plate portion and the bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131a. . The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates up and down, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmitting member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is recessed downward from above and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the back lower second decorative body 3120 is inserted therein. The open front end sides of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d are closed by a unit cover 3142.

  The rear back first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at the right side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the front view via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The rear back second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 via the second drive motor bracket 3138 at the left position of the decorative body support shaft 3125 when viewed from the front.

  The backside first drive motor 3134 rotates the first drive gear 3133 to rotate together with the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 meshing with the first drive gear 3133. The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back. On the other hand, the rear back second drive motor 3137 rotates the second drive gear 3136 so that the second decorative body side operation gear 3126 at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 meshed with the second drive gear 3136 The second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the slide unit 3150 of the rear rear movable production unit 3100 is attached to a box-like unit base 3151 which is attached in a back box 3010 and is opened at the front and upper sides, and is attached to an upper part in the unit base 3151. The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted on the front surface and is attached to the slide guide 3152 extending in the left and right directions, and rotatably mounted about the axis extending in the front-rear direction at the approximate center in the horizontal direction in the unit base 3151. In the rotation drive unit 3130, a transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a meshing with a rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143, and a spur gear 3153b having a larger diameter than the pinion gear 3153a and a spur gear-like driven gear 3153b that is larger in diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153 , A spur gear-like drive gear 3154 meshing with the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, a back and bottom rear third drive motor 3155 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 by rotating the drive gear 3154, and the unit base 3151 and a slide detection sensor 3156 for detecting the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a substantially lower half of the front open part of the unit base 3151 are closed to close the unit base 3151. A horizontally long flat slide cover 3157 attached to the front end, and a back and back rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. ing.

  The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotation drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The rear back third drive motor 3155 rotates and drives the drive gear 3154 to rotate and drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 engaged with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 meshing with.

  Next, the operation of the back-under-behind movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 (a), the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 is positioned at the right end when viewed from the front with respect to the left and right sliding directions by the slide unit 3150. ing. Further, in a normal state, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 face each other with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, and then the back bottom back The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 (the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed forward. In this normal state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are positioned on the right side of the front view with respect to the axis of rotation of the hinge extending vertically (decorative body support shaft 3125). doing. Further, in a normal state, the side opposite to the decorative body support shaft 3125 side that is supported so as to be able to rotate the hinges of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is the decorative body. The whole rotates so as to be positioned forward of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction in plan view.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 103, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. Further, in a normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back side is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Further, in a normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decoration body support shaft 3125 in the second back and rear decoration body 3120 is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  Also, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 and the like, the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 facing the front (front) of the back bottom rear movable decorative body unit 3100 in the assembled state on the game board 5. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right of the front view, in the lower part of the right corner of the front view in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. In this normal state, as described above, the right side of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is positioned in front of the center of hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device The display screen 3114 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100 so as to face the vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a.

  In this normal state, the second rear drive motor 3137 behind the rotary drive unit 3130 passes the second drive gear 3136, the second decorative body side operation gear 3126, and the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the second rear rear back When the second decorative body 3120 is rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view (160 degrees) so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the back of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, the back is closed The back bottom back first decorative body 3110 positioned in front of the back second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together, and the back bottom on which the decoration of “Ten fortune” is applied. The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing the front (see FIG. 104 (b)). In addition, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 facing the front in a normal state is in a state facing the rear and is not visible from the player side. Note that from this state, neither the back-behind first decorative body 3110 nor the back-behind second decorative body 3120 can be rotated further in the clockwise direction in plan view.

  In the state of FIG. 104 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmitting member 3132 that rotates together with the first backside decorative body 3110 is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration body support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decoration body 3120 is in a non-detected state with respect to detection by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the third drive motor 3155 after the back of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 Via the 3143a, the rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position of the left end in the front view together with the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid and moved to the position of the left end when viewed from the front in the state where it is assembled to the game board 5, the axis (the center line of the decorative body support shaft 3125) extending vertically in the hinge rotation is The game area 5a substantially coincides with the center in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which it is slid to the position of the left end in front view while maintaining the state of FIG. 104 (b). 105 (d) is moved to the position of the left end in front view in the state of FIG. 104 (a), and the first drive gear 3133, the rotation transmitting member is driven by the first drive motor 3134 after the back side. The back lower back first decorative body is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction in plan view via the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of 3132. The first backside rear first decorative body 3110 by driving the backside back first drive motor 3134 from the state shown in FIG. 104 (c) with the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of 3110 facing directly in front. Is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, thereby rotating the back lower back second decorative body 3120 together with the back lower back first decorative body 3110 to change the first back of the back lower first decorative body 3110 One decorative surface 3111 ( A state with its blanking liquid crystal display device 3114) in front shows.

  Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 104 (c), the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in plan view by driving the back-bottom rear second drive motor 3137, or FIG. In the state of (d), when the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 is rotated 180 degrees in a clockwise direction in plan view by driving the back bottom back first drive motor 3134, as shown in FIG. 105 (e). From the state in which the second decorative surface 3112 of the first backside decorative body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the backside back second decorative body 3120 are folded so as to face each other, the hinge is rotated and the back bottom back The first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and face the front.

  In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back back rear first decorative body 3110 and the back back rear second decorative body 310 are overlapped with each other and closed. By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the rear back second decorative body 3120 on the left and right sides, the decorative surface formed by the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed. The size is doubled so that the player can be noticeable in the game area 5a and attract the player's attention strongly, and the player can be surprised by the appearance of a large decoration. In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are integrated, and the character “holy” is displayed. The decoration becomes visible. Note that the first decorative surface 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are provided on the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 of the first back and rear decorative body 3110 and the second back and rear decorative body 3120, respectively. The first decoration 3115 and the second hinge 3124 are provided when the decoration corresponding to the applied decoration is applied, and the first back and rear second decorative body 3110 and the second back and bottom second decorative body 3120 are opened. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character of “holy” can be visually recognized by the player in a good state.

  As shown in the drawing, an integrated decoration formed by the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120 includes “ A cutout decoration 3170 such as “1” is formed. This cut-out decoration 3170 is a decoration obtained by cutting out a part of one character or pattern, and on the upper side of the cut-out decoration 3170, a back-upper left first decorative body 3210 of a back-up / left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cut decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the upper left second decoration body 3220 are arranged on the left and right is positioned, the entire character of “sparrow” is completed. Yes (see FIG. 134).

  As described above, according to the back-under-behind movable effect unit 3100 of this embodiment, the back-under-bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 are closed from each other with their surfaces overlapped. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are opened side by side, the decorative surfaces of the first back and bottom second decorative body 3110 and the second back and bottom second decorative body 3120 are expanded (expanded) in the front view game area 5a. ) And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 that are closed and cannot be seen from the player side are opened, and can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In the state (see FIG. 105 (d)), when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 is rotated and aligned on the left side of the front back rear second decorative body 3120, the first back lower back first decorative body is initially set. The back decorative first decorative body 3110 and the back decorative back second decorative body 3120 of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 become two so that the decoration area which is only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 extends leftward. The decorative area is doubled and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 that have not been seen so far are visible from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Alternatively, with the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 facing forward (FIG. 104 (c)). When the rear back second decorative body 3120 is rotated and aligned on the right side of the front view rear first decorative body 3110 when viewed from the front, only the first decorative surface 3121 of the back bottom second decorative body 3120 is initially used. The decoration area is doubled so that the decoration area extends to the right so that the decoration area becomes two of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back bottom rear first decoration body 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration body 3120. In addition, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 that have not been seen so far can be viewed from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Thus, by opening the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decoration range by the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 Can be enlarged and the decoration can be changed, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest is given to the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120. Attracting strongly, you can enjoy the decoration spread by the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back, and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are put together in a state where the back back back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped and closed. When the first back side back decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 are rotated around one of the vertically extending sides, which is attached to the hinge, In this state, when the rear side rear decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are rotated so that the surface (back surface) facing rearward is directed frontward, the entire position of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is the center axis of the hinge rotation. It will move to the position on the opposite side across. More specifically, the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 faces forward. (See FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)), when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the back lower back first decorative body. 3110 and the entire backside rear second decorative body 3120 move to the left in front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the backside rear second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIG. 104 (b) and (See (c)). On the other hand, with the back back first decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 closed, the first decorative surface 3121 of the back back back second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIG. 104B). And (c)), when the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 The whole moves to the right when viewed from the front, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 after back is turned forward (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)). Thereby, the area of decoration by the back bottom first decorative body 3110 or the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side is changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120, and the backside back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body. It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of 3120 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the state where the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped and closed, one of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 or the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 is attached. In any case, when rotating and opening, or rotating the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom second decorative body 3120 together, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back Since the surface of the second decorative body 3120 that is visible from the player side starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation, the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120 are opened, or It is difficult to understand whether they rotate together, and it can be exciting and exciting depending on which action the player performs, and can increase the player's expectation. In addition, with respect to the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened and rotated together, the player Since the decoration changes that are visible from the side are different, the player can enjoy the decoration changes in various patterns, and the player can be made bored by various effects.

  As described above, the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment has the first back with the different decorations by rotating the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 by hinges. The decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 can be directed to the front, and the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are slid in the horizontal direction by the slide unit 3150. And various presentations can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (a position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending up and down of the rectangular outer shape in the second back back decorative body 3120. The upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward on the same axis as the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130, respectively. It is supported so that it can be rotated at two locations as far apart as possible. Therefore, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from the position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120, so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is located above the decorative body support shaft 3125. Even if an unbalanced load is applied to incline the decorative body support shaft 3125 due to the weight of the attached back bottom first decorative body 3110 and back bottom back second decorative body 3120, the decorative body support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt. It is possible to support the decoration body support shaft 3125 in a straight line, and to rotate the back bottom back first decoration body 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration body 3120. In other words, the upper and lower ends of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotational drive unit base 3131. Since the support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt, the heavy weight of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 that are attached to each other so as to be hinge-rotating can be placed on the same axis as the hinge rotation axis. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[5-9d. Back top left movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left moveable effect unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 109 (b) shows the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is the front view shown in the state moved to the position of the right end of front view, and (c) shows in the state where the back upper left first decoration object and the back upper left second decoration object were developed from the state of (b). It is a front view.

  The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the left end of the front view to the vicinity of the center. The upper back left movable effect unit 3200 has a quadrilateral shape in front view and a front upper left first decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 extends up and down in front view. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 which is mounted on the right side of the right side so as to be hinge-rotatable and has different decorations on the two faces facing away from each other, and the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 is mounted above The rotary upper drive unit 3230 for rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by hinges, and the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 slid in the left-right direction together with the rotary drive unit 3230. And a slide unit 3240 mounted in the back box 3010.

The back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a flat fixed decorative member 3211 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and translucency, and the front end of the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view A cylindrical first hinge part 3212 that is attached outwardly from the side and that is coaxially spaced apart from the upper and lower axes and that is attached to the upper and lower axes, and the entire rear face of the fixed decorative member 3211 is covered. The first decorative body base 3213 is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211, and is attached between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. A first upper decorative base 321, which is connected to the upper left side of the first upper decorative board 3214 and the upper face of the first decorative body base 3213 with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, is L-shaped in side view. A connecting portion 3215 extending from the left end to the right side of the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending to the left and right, and from the vicinity of the left end of the connecting portion 3215 to the front. And a flat plate-like detection piece 3217 that extends.
It has.

  The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a rectangular shape with a slightly long shape in front view. The fixed decorative member 3211 has sides extending in the right and left sides extending to the left and right of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. The lengths of the sides that are the same length and that extend vertically are shorter than the lengths of the sides that extend vertically of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration provided with the left half of the character “sparrow”. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the present embodiment, the lower part of the character “sparrow” is disconnected from the upper side of the lowermost “one” part.

  The three first hinge portions 3212 are respectively provided at the upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the upper position from the center in the vertical direction. The three first hinge portions 3212 protrude rightward and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 when viewed from the front. A rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decorative body base 3213 on the front surface of a portion protruding upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connection portion 3215 on the rear surface of the portion extending vertically in the L shape in side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can make the fixed decorative member 3211 emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative board 3214.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a rectangular outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 having translucency in which the decoration different from the first decorative member 3221 is applied to the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221 and the left and right of the first decorative member 3221 Two second hinge parts 3223 projecting outward from one of the two sides extending vertically and attached to the first hinge part 3212 of the first upper decorative body 3210 on the back side so as to be capable of hinge rotation; A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-like operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member 221 and the back on the left second decorative substrate having a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides is mounted between the second decorative member 3222 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is provided with a decoration with “Dokun” characters on the surface. The second decorative member 3222 has a decoration in which the right half of the character “sparrow” is formed on the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 is positioned on the left side in front of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 so that it can be recognized as a “sparrow” character. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decoration member 3211 and the second decoration member 3222 is a cut-out decoration 3260 in which the lower part is cut off from the upper side of the lowermost “one” part with respect to the character “sparrow”. On the lower side, the decorations (cut-out decorations) of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back-under-bottom-first decorative body 3110 and the back-bottom-after-back second decoration body 3120 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character of “sparrow” is completed. Note that the cut decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters “sparrow”, so that it can be recognized as the characters “sparrow” even if the lower portion is cut out.

  The two second hinge portions 3223 protrude rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and each is provided at a position closer to the center from the upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The operating gear 3225 is attached to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operation gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotation drive unit 3230.

  This back upper left second decorative body 3220 can make the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 emit light by appropriately emitting light from an LED mounted on a back upper left first decorative board (not shown). .

  The rotation drive unit 3230 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a space between the rotation drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decoration body base 3213 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the rotation drive base 3231. A rotation drive cover 3232 that is formed and attached to the upper side of the rotation drive base 3231; an operation gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is rotatably attached between the rotation drive cover 3232 and the rotation drive base 3231; A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear (not shown) that meshes with the transmission gear 3233, and a back-upper left first drive motor that is attached to the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232 by rotating the drive gear. 3235 and the rotational position of the drive gear attached between the rotational drive base 3231 and the rotational drive cover 3232. Rotation detecting sensor for detecting a (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The rotation drive base 3231 of the rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decoration member 3211 in the first decoration body base 3213 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) includes a detection piece extending outward, and the rotation position of the drive gear is detected by detecting the detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, And the rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operation gear 3225.

  The rotational drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left first drive motor 3235 to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 through the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operation gear 3225. Can do.

  The slide unit 3240 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the back box 3010 in a horizontally long unit base 3241, a horizontally long slide rail 3242 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241, and slidably attached to the slide rail 3242. And a base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so that a space is formed between the slider 3243 and the connecting portion 3215 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 on the front surface. The back upper left second drive motor 3245 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241 through the base cover 3244, and the back upper left second drive. Attached to the rotating shaft of motor 3245 A unit base 3241 having a spur gear-like drive gear 3246, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a meshing with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b rotating integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. A transmission gear member 3247 rotatably attached to the cover 3244 and a second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247 and meshes with the rack gear 3216 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. A pinion gear 3248 that is rotatably attached between the base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a slide detection sensor 3249 that is attached to the base cover 3244 and detects the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. I have.

  The slide unit 3240 is attached to the left part of the front surface of the base cover 3244 in the front view. The back upper left first decorative board 3214, the back upper left second decorative board, the back upper left first drive motor 3235, the rotation detection sensor, The back upper left second drive motor 3245, the back upper left relay board 3250 relaying the connection between the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043, and the front surface of the back upper left relay board 3250 are covered. A substrate cover 3251 attached to the front surface, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front surface of the substrate cover 3251, and a back left upper decorative substrate 3253 attached to the front surface of the back left upper decorative base 3252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. A predetermined decoration is attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 so as to cover the front of the back upper left decorative board 3253. A back left upper ornamental body 3254 having formed the translucent, and a.

  When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back upper left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 moves the back upper left first decorative body 3210 back through the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. The second left decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 can be slid in the left-right direction. In addition, the back left upper decorative body 3254 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the back upper decorative substrate 3253.

  Next, the operation of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a back upper left second decorative body 3220 that covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 in the normal state. The left second decorative body 3220 is folded to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 by the rotation drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It has become a state. Further, in the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the back upper left decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

  In a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the player side Is not visible (see FIG. 81 and the like).

  When the pinion gear 3248 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the upper left second drive motor 3245 on the back of the slide unit 3240 in a normal state, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right together with the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 meshing with 3248 and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 109 (b)). In this state, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending axis in the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is vertically centered in the game area 5 a. The first upper decorative body 3210 on the back is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133).

  Then, with the back upper left first decorative body 3210 positioned at the right end in front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotation drive unit 3230 passes the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is folded and covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is developed. And the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 is aligned on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 109 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged in the left and right directions, so that the size is approximately twice that of the normal state. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player.

  In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side and face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. It becomes possible to visually recognize the decoration of the character of “Sparrow”. Note that the first hinge part 3212 and the second hinge part 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 have decorations applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. Corresponding decorations are provided, and when the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is opened from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, the first hinge part 3212 and the second hinge part 3223 may become inconspicuous. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the character of “sparrow” in a good state.

  It should be noted that the decoration of the “sparrow” character that can be seen as one piece is cut off from the upper side of the lowermost “one” part, and the upper left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back It is integrated with the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable production unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. As a result, the character “sparrow” is in a complete state (see FIG. 134).

  As described above, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction or extends the back upper left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge around the axis, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be folded so as to cover the front surface, or the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be deployed so as to be lined up on the right side of the front view. And various presentations can be presented to the player.

[5-9e. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. 110 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 111 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported so as to be slidable in the left and right directions behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and the back right fixed decorative body 3310. A frame-shaped back right movable decorative body 3320 with decoration and a back right movable decorative body 3320 are slid in the left-right direction to be mounted in the back box 3010, and a back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front surface. A back left drive unit 3330.

  The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a vertically long front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is three-dimensionally decorated and has a translucent fixed side decorative member 3311 and a fixed side decorative member 3311 attached to the rear surface, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The back left fixed decorative board 3312 is provided. As shown in the drawing, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a decoration “發”. This back left fixed decorative body 3310 can make the fixed side decorative member 3311 emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312.

  The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long rectangle whose front view is approximately the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a translucent frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321. And a frame-like movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decoration frame 3322, and a back-left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decoration frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3324.

  The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. The movable base 3323 has a lower end projecting downward from the movable decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and this projecting portion is attached by a back left drive unit 3330 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U shape so as to extend along the right side of the center of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The movable side decorative member 3321 can be illuminated and illuminated by causing the LED on the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 to emit light.

  The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide in the left-right direction. The slide guide 3332 that extends in the left-right direction, the back left drive motor 3333 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 are A hook-like actuating arm (not shown) that is attached and connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320 and a slide detection sensor 3335 that is attached to the unit base 3331 by detecting the rotational position of the actuating arm. And the back left fixed decorative board 3312 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331. Urahidari movable decorative substrate 3324, and a Urahidari relay board 3336 that relays the connection between the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and effect driving substrate 3043, the.

  The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 has the back left fixed decorative body 3310 attached to the front side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side when viewed from the front. The slide guide 3332 is attached so that the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 in the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 when viewed from the back. The actuating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotating shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end of the bottom side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 having a frame shape. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the action | operation arm is formed with the slit which penetrated back and forth at the front-end | tip and extended in the longitudinal direction. A guide pin protruding rearward from the lower right corner of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the back view is slidably inserted into the slit.

  Next, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 has a back left movable decorative body 3320 located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 as shown in FIG. 111 (a), and is hardly visible from the front. It is in a state. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the immersion position where it cannot be visually recognized. In this normal state, an operating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. Further, in a normal state, a part of the right end of the back left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the back left The left side of the front face of the fixed decorative body can be viewed from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. ing.

  In this normal state, when the operating arm is rotated counterclockwise by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the operating arm is moved. The operating arm is pressed rightward in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid straightly to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right-side portion of the frame-like back left fixed decorative body 3320 is located on the right side from the rear side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the slide movement to the right stops. As a result, a portion on the right side of the left side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 is positioned on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be viewed from the front (see FIG. 111B). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at an appearance position that is visible from the player side.

  In a state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the right and is located at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is assembled from the game board 5 and the back left movable decorative body 3320 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the player side. While being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect animation) is displayed in the display area directly behind the back left movable decorative body 3320, the player can also display the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. It is possible to make an illusion that a liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. Thereby, the player can have an illusion that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 in the first back and bottom decorative body 3110 of the back and back movable effect unit 3100.

[5-9f. Backward middle movable production unit]
Next, the inside / outside movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 123. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the rear middle movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear middle movable effect unit. FIG. 113 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear middle movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 (b) is an exploded view of the rear middle movable production unit for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the back middle decorative body unit of the back middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the back middle decorative body unit from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the front and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 117 (a) is an explanatory view showing the driving configuration of the back upper middle decorative body unit from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and FIG. 118 (b) is a state in which a pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit are half opened outward. (C) is a front view showing the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a state where they are fully opened outward.

  Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back middle moving effect unit of the back middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the front middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back middle drive unit for each main configuration from the back. FIG. FIG. 121 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle rotary unit of the rear upper middle drive unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive system of the back / middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 123A is a front view of the back middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 123B is a front view showing the back upper middle decorative body unit lowered in the back middle movable effect unit. .

  The back / middle movable effect unit 3400 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right end. As shown in FIG. 113, the back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 that can be opened and closed. A back middle decorative body unit 3410 having a back middle second decorative body 3412, a rotary connecting member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back middle decorative body unit 3410, and a rotary connecting member 3430. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is mounted so as to be movable up and down and rotatable, and the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back upper right decoration mounted on the front surface of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. The unit 3480 and the back middle relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the back middle drive unit 3440 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back middle movable production unit 3400 is a pair of back middle middle decorative bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency. 3411, a back middle second decorative body 3412 having translucency, which is disposed behind the pair of back middle first decorative bodies 3411 and has a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back middle first decorations A pair of light-transmitting flat plate-like slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of LEDs mounted on the rear surfaces of the pair of slide bases 3413 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, respectively. A back middle first decorative substrate 3414, a back middle second decorative substrate 3415 attached to the rear surface of the back middle second decorative body 3412 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the back middle second decorative substrate. Cover the back of 3415 On the rear side of the substrate cover 3416 so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second upper decorative body 3412 and the substrate cover 3416. A flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 that is attached, and a decorative unit base 3418 that is attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417 are provided.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3410 has a motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418, and is attached to the rear surface of the motor base 3419, and a rotating shaft projects from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A first drive motor 3420 on the back side, and a spur gear-like first drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of the first drive motor 3420 on the back side and disposed between the motor base 3419 and the decorative body unit base 3418. 3421 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 that meshes with the first drive gear 3421 and is rotatably attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 so that the front end protrudes forward of the decorative body unit base. Meshed with the first transmission gear 3422 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative body unit base 3418. It includes a first pinion gear 3423, a.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3410 meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss that attaches one of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the slider cover 3417. The first slider 3424 having 3424b and slidably mounted between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative body unit base 3418 and the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. And a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 on the opposite side and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that passes through the slider cover 3417 and attaches the other (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , Slider cover 3417 and decorative unit A second slider 3425 that is slidably attached to the base 3418 in the left-right direction, and a slide detection sensor 3426 that is attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 from the rear side and detects the slide position of the second slider 3425. It is equipped with.

  The pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 has a shape in a front view, and one end in the longitudinal direction of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges outward in a semicircular arc, The opposite end is recessed inwardly in a semicircular arc, and a portion recessed in the semicircular arc is a recess 3411a. The pair of back-side middle first decorative bodies 3411 has a plate-like shape extending rearward except for an end side where a concave portion 3411a recessed in a semicircular arc shape is formed inward. The first decorative body 3411 on the pair of back surfaces is attached in a state in which the ends on which the recesses 3411a are formed face each other. The pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are formed in translucent milky white as a whole, and the front side of one back upper middle decorative body 3411 has a “dragon” head side. On the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the remaining (other) back side, the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” is formed so as to have a metallic luster.

  The back upper middle decorative body 3412 is a flat plate extending in the left-right direction, and is slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Has been. The middle second decorative body 3412 on the back side is a circular center bulging portion 3412a that can be inserted into the concave portion 3411a of the middle middle decorative body 3411 on the back side, and the left and right sides of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular central horizontal decorative portion 3412b formed on the both sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b and two circular outer central decorative portions 3412b formed on the left and right sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b. An intermediate decorative portion 3412c and a circular end decorative portion 3412d that is formed in the vicinity of the left and right end portions on both the left and right sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c and has a larger diameter than the intermediate decorative portion 3412c are provided. The back middle second decorative body 3412 is formed in a translucent milky white color as a whole. The outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d on the front surface, etc. In addition, a linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed. The middle second decorative body 3412 on the back is decorated so as to remind the player of the “dot” of “Mahjong”.

  Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first upper decorative body 3411 on the back, and is located behind the outer periphery extending rearward of the first decorative body 3411 on the back. Installed at the end. As a result, by assembling the back upper middle decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the rear upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413 are positioned between the portion forming the front surface of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413. A space in which the second decorative body 3412, the back and middle second decorative substrate 3415, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted is formed. Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 includes slits 3413a penetrating front and rear and extending left and right. Of the pair of slide bases 3413, in one slide base 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side near the upper side, and in the remaining slide base 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side near the lower side. Further, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The pair of backside middle first decorative substrates 3414 and backside middle second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates whose surfaces (entire surfaces) are white. This makes it easy to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate less noticeable. Since the back middle first decorative body 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 that is rearwardly separated from the portion forming the front surface of the back top middle first decorative body 3411, the light from the LED is on the back middle. Since the light irradiation range is widened before reaching the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, the entire first decorative body 3411 in the back can be uniformly decorated with light emission. it can. On the other hand, the back middle second decorative substrate 3415 can illuminate and decorate the whole back top second decorative body 3412. In addition, the back middle second decorative body 3412 has a central decorative portion 3412a and a central horizontal decorative portion. 3412b, the intermediate decoration part 3412c, and the edge decoration part 3412d can be independently decorated with light emission.

  The substrate cover 3416 includes a mounting boss 3416a that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of both left and right ends of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The mounting boss 3416 a of the substrate cover 3416 is attached to the slider cover 3417 at the rear end that passes through the slit 3413 a of the slide base 3413. Further, the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 slides relatively in the left-right direction in the slit 3413a via a bush 3427 that is rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

  The slider cover 3417 penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right, and the first slit 3417a through which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted, and penetrates forward and backward and extends to the left and right. And a second slit 3417b through which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second slit 3417b is formed in the vicinity of the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  The first pinion gear 3423 is arranged slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 117). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged side by side from the left end in front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have front ends projecting forward through the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417, and the first decoration on the back on which the decoration on the head side of the “dragon” is applied. It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have a front end protruding through the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417 and projecting forward. It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. The second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that protrudes upward from the upper part near the right end in a front view. The detection piece 3425c is detected by a slide detection sensor 3426.

  Next, the operation of the back middle decorative body unit 3410 in the back middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the like, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 is closed with the ends on the recess 3411a side of the pair of back middle first decorative bodies 3411 in contact with each other. Yes. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 bulges forward through a circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other parts of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are from the front. It cannot be visually recognized.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the left end portion in front view of the first slider 3424 and the right end portion in front view of the second slider 2425 are in the horizontal direction of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410. Located near the center. Further, the detection piece 3425 c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), if the central decorative portion 3412a is illuminated with the back and middle second decorative substrate 3415, the player can be presented with a decoration reminiscent of the “thousand-point stick” of “Mahjong”. In addition, when the entire backside / inside second decorative body 3412 is illuminated with the backside / inside 2nd decorative board 3415 in a normal state, the backside / inside 1st decoration covering the front of the backside / inside 2nd decorative body 3412. The entire body 3411 can be decorated with light emission. Further, when the LED of the back upper middle decorative body 3414 is caused to emit light in a normal state, the rear surface of the back upper middle second decorative body 3415 formed in white, the back upper middle first decorative body 3414 Reflecting and diffusing on the front surface, etc., the outer periphery of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface can be decorated with light emission.

  When the first pinion gear 3423 is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the first drive motor 3420 from the normal state through the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 from the normal state, By the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 engaged with the pinion gear 3423, the first slider 3424 slides to the left in the front view, and the second slider 3425 moves to the right in the front view. Move the slide. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 on the back side with the decoration on the head side of the “dragon” attached via the attachment boss 3424b of the first slider 3424 slides to the left in front view, and the first The first decorative body 3411 with the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” attached via the mounting boss 3425b of the two slider 3425 slides to the right in the front view. The first decorative body 3411 slides and opens in a direction away from each other.

  When the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are slid and moved in directions away from each other, the back upper middle first decorative bodies are formed between the ends on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411. A part of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 arranged behind the 3411 faces forward. And the back side middle first drive motor 3420 in a state where the central lateral decoration part 3412b of the back side middle second decorative body 3412 faces the front from between the pair of back side middle first decorative bodies 3411. Is temporarily stopped. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the center decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and the four inner decorative parts 3412a between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are arranged. The central lateral decoration portion 3412b faces forward. In this state, if the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are light-decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 in the back, the decoration that is reminiscent of “Mahjong” “5,000-point stick” can be shown to the player. it can.

  From this state, when the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid and moved away from each other by the back-upper middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. As shown in c), between the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, substantially the entire back-upper middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward (fully open state). In this state, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back middle second decorative body 3412 face forward, and the back middle second decorative substrate. When the central decoration part 3412a, the central horizontal decoration part 3412b, the intermediate decoration part 3412c, and the end decoration part 3412d are light-decorated by 3415, the decoration that reminds the “million-stick” of “Mahjong” can be shown to the player. it can. In this state, the back middle first decorative body 3411 and the back middle second decorative body 3412 are entirely decorated with light emission by the back middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back middle second decorative substrate 3415. be able to.

  Subsequently, the rotation connecting member 3430 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the center in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418 in the back top middle decorative body unit 3410, and on the back of the back top middle driving unit 3440. The intermediate rotation unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 attached rotatably to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bushing 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461 in the upper middle rotation unit 3460.

  Next, the back middle drive unit 3440 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, the back middle drive unit 3440 is capable of rotating the back middle rotary unit 3460 for attaching the back middle decorative body unit 3410 so as to be able to rotate, and the back middle rotary unit 3460 can be rotated on the front side. A base base 3441 which is attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the upper middle rotating unit 3460, and a base cover 3442 which is attached in the back box 3010. 3442 is a front middle second drive motor 3443 which is attached to the front surface of 3442 and has a rotating shaft that protrudes rearward through the base cover 3442, and a flat surface attached to the rear shaft of the second middle middle drive motor 3443. A gear-shaped second drive gear 3444 and a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear meshing with the second drive gear 3444 A second transmission gear 3445 having a small-diameter spur gear-like small-diameter transmission gear 3445b that rotates integrally with the 3445a and the large-diameter transmission gear 3445a, and is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442; A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a meshing with a small-diameter transmission gear 3445b of 3445 and a cylindrical drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface of the gear portion 3446a are rotatably attached to the base cover 3442. , And a drive pin 3446b of the lift drive gear 3446 is inserted therethrough and has an arcuate slit 3447a protruding rearward. The second drive gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the lift drive It is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the gear 3446 and the base. Includes cover 3442 in cooperation with the second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and the elevation drive gear 3446 plate-like gear cover 3447 are rotatably mounted to, the.

  The back middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and includes a rotation detection sensor 3448 for detecting the rotation position of the back middle rotation unit 3460, and the unit base 3441 and the back middle rotation unit 3460. An assist spring 3449 that is attached in between and urges the back middle rotating unit 3460 in the direction in which the back middle decorative body unit 3410 rises, and extends in the longitudinal direction while penetrating back and forth in the form of a belt. An assist arm 3450 having an assist slit 3450a and having a proximal end rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441. An arm presser 3451 attached to the front surface of That.

  As shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the back middle rotation unit 3460 of the back middle drive unit 3440 includes a bearing portion 3461a that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, a long hole that passes through the front and rear and extends in a predetermined direction. Drive slit 3461b into which drive pin 3446b of elevating drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, insertion hole 3461c into which connection bushing 3432 of rotary connection member 3430 is inserted, and assist slit of assist arm 3450 protruding rearward It has a cylindrical assist pin 3461d inserted into 3450a, and rotates so as to close a shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 opened at the rear and the opened rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. A rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461; It is equipped with a.

  Further, the back middle rotation unit 3460 includes a back middle third drive motor 3463 attached to the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 so that the rotation shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461. A spur gear-shaped third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotary shaft of the third drive motor 3463 in the middle of the back side, meshed with the third drive gear 3464, and rotatable by the rotary unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. A spur gear-shaped drive pinion gear 3465 and a hook-shaped transmission rack gear that meshes with the drive pinion gear 3465 and is slidably mounted between the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 in a predetermined direction. 3466 is engaged with the transmission rack gear 3466 and the rotation unit base 3461 is inserted. A spur gear-like driven pinion gear 3467, which is rotatably attached by a rotary unit base 3461 and a rear cover 3462 at a position coaxial with 3461c, and a rear end of the connection base 3431 of the rotary connection member 3430 is attached to the front surface; It has.

  Further, the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and an assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 are inserted inside. A bush-shaped cylindrical bush 3469 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 on the outside, and the bush 3469 is attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461, and the bush 3469 is pulled out from the assist pin 3461d. And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing the above.

  The unit base 3441 of the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is formed in a shape such that the upper part of the left side of a quadrilateral front view that protrudes vertically protrudes to the left. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably mounting the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back upper middle rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 near the right end of the front view at the upper end of the front surface, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end of the front view.

  The back second drive motor 3463 is attached near the upper end of the front surface of the base cover 3442. The lift drive gear 3446 to which the rotational drive of the back upper second drive motor 3463 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 is located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. (See FIG. 122).

  The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same surface without rattling by being pressed toward the unit base 3441 by the arm presser 3451.

  The rotation unit base 3461 of the middle upper rotation unit 3460 extends in the left-right direction, and a bearing portion 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in a front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends longer than the transmission rack gear 3466 to the left and right along the lower side. The rotation unit base 3461 slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466 and projects upward from the upper right end of the front view. A detection piece 3461f detected by the sensor.

  The back middle third drive motor 3463 is attached to the approximate center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c in the rotary unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the outer peripheral gear teeth meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and do not rotate once. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion where no gear teeth are formed on the outer periphery, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by a rotation detection sensor 3468.

  Next, the back upper right decoration unit 3480 of the back / middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decoration unit 3480 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3442 at a position in front of the back middle second drive motor 3443 in the back top middle drive unit 3440 and the front surface of the decoration base 3481. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front face of the cage, and a back upper right decorative body 3383 having translucency, disposed in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and attached to the front face of the decorative base 3481; It is equipped with.

  The back upper right decorative unit 3480 can light up and decorate the back upper right decorative body 3383 by causing the LED of the back upper right decorative board 3482 to emit light. The back upper right decorative body 3484 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled to the game board 5 and the gate portion 2003 in the right hit distribution space 2541 in the right hit game area 2540 in the front view of the center accessory 2500 and the general prize. It is located between the mouth 2001 and the inside of the upper right circulation space 2541 can be illuminated and illuminated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

  The back middle relay board 3490 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 includes a back middle first decorative board 3414, a back middle second decorative board 3415, a back middle first drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, and a back top. The middle second drive motor 3443, the rotation detection sensor 3448, the back middle third drive motor 3463, the rotation detection sensor 3468, the back upper right decorative board 3482, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510, Is connected.

  Next, the operation of the back middle moving effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the back middle driving unit 3440. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400 has a back-upper middle decorative body unit 3410 extending left and right so that its longitudinal direction is horizontal, as shown in FIG. The back middle drive unit 3440 is positioned slightly below the upper side of the unit base 3441. In this normal state, the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and closed.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 122, the back middle rotation unit 3460 is positioned at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the lifting drive gear 3446 is driven by the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. It is located at the lower end. In this state, a rotational moment acting to rotate counterclockwise around the rotation support pin 3441a acts on the back middle rotation unit 3460 with the weight of the back middle decoration unit 3410 and the like as a center. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left via the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevating drive gear 3446 attempts to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevating drive gear 3446 and is a line orthogonal to the direction in which the drive slit 3461b extends. Therefore, the elevating drive gear 3446 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end in the drive slit 3461b, the elevating drive gear 3446 can no longer rotate in the clockwise direction, and the back upper middle rotating unit 3460. Is maintained in a normal state, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is locked in a raised state. In this state, the lifting drive gear 3446 does not rotate in spite of the action of the rotational moment, so that a load is applied to the back middle second drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. No, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even when the back middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

  In a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 that is slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is positioned at the moving end where the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) is far away, and A driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 is positioned near the rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is positioned above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 that is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 has a base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

  In the normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. In a normal state, the pair of first upper and lower middle decorative bodies 3411 extending horizontally and closed in the assembled state on the game board 5 are the main liquid crystal display device 1600 within the frame of the front view center accessory 2500. It is located above the display screen so as to be visible from the player side (see FIG. 81, etc.).

  When the up / down drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the second drive motor 3443 through the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 from the normal state, The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise in the drive slit 3461b. The drive pin 3446b revolves counterclockwise when viewed from the front, whereby the drive pin 3446b presses the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the back middle rotation unit 3460 supports the rotation through the drive slit 3461b. The pin 3441a rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  When the middle rotating unit 3460 on the back is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the insertion hole of the rotating unit base 3461 located on the left side when viewed from the front above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a). The 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back upper decorative body unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the rotation support pin 3441a. While rotating, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip side.

  Then, when the back middle rotating unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, the rotation driving of the back middle second driving motor 3443 stops and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is stopped. The (driven pinion gear 3467) is positioned below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end (see FIG. 123 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 is in contact with the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d is in contact with the end of the assist slit 3450a. It is in a state where the rotation is restricted as described above.

  When the back upper middle rotating unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end, the rear upper middle ornament is assembled in the game board 5. The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decorative portion 3412a of the middle second decorative body 3412 on the back) is located at the approximate center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

  In a state where the back upper decorative unit 3410 is moved to the lower end, the back pinion third drive motor 3463 rotates the drive pinion gear 3465 through the third drive gear 3464 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides in the slide groove 3461e in the right direction when viewed from the front. When the transmission rack gear 3466 slides to the right, the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and is connected to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. Through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430, the back upper decorative unit 3410 also rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  In this back middle rotation unit 3460, the back middle decoration body unit 3410 can be rotated counterclockwise in front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the slide groove 3461e in front view. In the present embodiment, the back middle decorative unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in a state where the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end, it can be rotated 208 degrees in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the normal state extending horizontally (FIG. 123 ( see b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 123 (b), the back middle first drive motor 3420 of the back middle decorative body unit 3410 is driven to slide the pair of back middle first decorative bodies 3411 away from each other. Move (see FIG. 138, FIG. 139, etc.).

  In this way, the back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400 converts the back-upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the pair of back-upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the back-upper middle second decorative body 3412 into the back-upper middle drive unit 3440. The first decorative body 3411 can be opened and closed between the pair of upper and lower backs, and various movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, “Mahjong” expressed by the decoration of the back middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back top middle first decorative bodies depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back top middle decorative bodies 3411. Since the score of the “spot” can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced by the score of the “spot”.

[5-9g. Front-bottom front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the front lower front movable effect unit other than the front lower front decorative body unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded front perspective view of the front lower front movable effect unit other than the front lower front decorative body unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the front back front decorative body unit of the front back front movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128 is an exploded front front decorative body unit of the front back front motion effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 129 is a front view schematically showing a decorative body unit elevating mechanism in the front-under-front movable effect unit. FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the lower back front decorative body unit is raised, and FIG. 130 (b) is an enlarged view of the unit elevating pin portion in FIG. (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit lifting pins and the lifting slits by further enlarging (b). FIG. 131 (a) is a front view showing the front back lower movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 131 (b) is a front view showing a state where the back bottom front decorative body unit is raised from the state of FIG. (C) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front 1st decoration body of the back lower front decoration body unit from the state of (b).

  The back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back front movable effect unit 3500 includes a front lower back decorative body unit 3501 to which a predetermined decoration is applied, and an elevating unit attached to the front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 by moving the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 up and down. 3502, a back lower left decorative unit 3503 attached to the front left end front surface of the lifting unit 3502, and a back lower middle decorative unit 3504 attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view on the front of the lifting unit 3502. A back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 attached from the left to the front of the back bottom middle decorative unit 3504 on the front of the lift unit 3502; a back lower front relay board 3506 attached to the rear face of the lift unit 3502; It has.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the back bottom front decorative body unit 3501 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 has a plate shape extending in the left and right directions and has different decorations on both sides. The body 3510 and the front lower front first decorative body 3510 are attached to the upper side extending left and right so that the hinge can be rotated, and is attached to the lifting unit 3502 so as to be movable up and down, and the front is decorated. A second decorative body 3520.

  The first backside front decorative body 3510 of the front backside decorative body unit 3501 is a rectangular box whose front view extends long in the left and right directions, a predetermined decoration is formed on the front surface, and a shallow box shape with a rear side opened and transparent. A light-transmitting first front decorative member 3511 and a shallow box-shaped light-transmitting member that is attached to the rear surface of the first front decorative member 3511 and has a predetermined decoration formed on the rear surface, with the front side open. A first back decorative member 3512, a first front decorative member 3513 which is attached between the first back decorative member 3512 and the first front decorative member 3511 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, Two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 projecting obliquely upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending left and right from the left and right ends of the front view on the upper side of the one-side decoration member 3512, and the first back decoration Member 3512 positive A decorative body lifting pin 3515 slidably inserted into a slit 3533a of a decorative body lifting arm 3533 in a back lower front second decorative body 3520, which will be described later, protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the view; A flat detection piece 3516 that protrudes rearward from the right side of the back decoration member 3512 when viewed from the front.

  Of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first lower-side front decorative body 3510 has a first hinge portion 3514 on the right side when viewed from the front, which is attached slightly to the left than the right end when viewed from the front of the first back-decorated member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the first decorative body 3511 in front of the lower back is decorated with a plurality of “Mahjong” “牌” arranged side by side.

  The back bottom front second decorative body 3520 of the back bottom front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger in the left and right and top and bottom than the back bottom front first decorative body 3510 and has a predetermined decoration on the front surface. An open shallow box-like second decorative member 3521 having translucency, and a back-bottom front second decorative substrate 3522 mounted on the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, , A flat board cover 3523 that covers the back of the second lower decorative board 3522 and is attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, and a front view of the upper side extending to the left and right of the second decorative member 3521. The first hinge portion 3514 of the first lower decorative body 3510 that projects obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the left and right end portions to the left and right is attached to be able to rotate the hinge. The two second hinge portions 3524 having a cylindrical shape, and the right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side of the front view of the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is the back lower front first decorative body 3510. A cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 inserted from the right side into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side of the front view of the first decorative body 3510 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the second decorative member 3521 in front view. A hinge press 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the left first hinge portion 3514.

  In addition, the back bottom front second decorative body 3520 has a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in front view and opened on the right side, and a rotating shaft extending through the gear base 3527. A front lower back first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side of the gear base 3527 in front view so as to protrude rightward, and a spur gear-like attached to the rotating shaft of the front lower back first drive motor 3528 First transmission gear 3529, transmission first gear 3530 meshed with first drive gear 3529 and rotatably attached to gear base 3527, meshed with transmission first gear 3530 and rotated to gear base 3527 A transmission second gear 3531 that is movably attached, a first elevating gear 3532 that meshes with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, On the left side of the base 3527 when viewed from the front, the first elevating gear 3532 rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532 and penetrates in the left-right direction, and extends on an axis passing through the center of rotation. Front view right side of decorative body lifting arm 3533 having slit 3533a slidably inserted, first drive gear 3529, transmission first gear 3530, transmission second gear 3531, and first lifting gear 3532 A flat gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527 and having the open right end of the gear base 3527 closed.

  Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface in front view of the second decorative member 3521 and can detect a detection piece 3516 of the front lower front first decorative body 3510; The sensor cover 3536 attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535, and the slider attached extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 when viewed from the front side A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the right end in rear view in the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523.

  In the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative body lift pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525 and 3526a, the lower back front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first A decoration body raising / lowering mechanism in which the gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, the first raising / lowering gear 3532, and the decoration body raising / lowering arm 3533 are moved up and down by hinge-rotating the back lower front first decoration body 3510 with respect to the axis extending left and right. 3501A is comprised.

  In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is formed in the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a long hole-like lifting slit 3540 that penetrates forward and backward and extends to the left and right. Have. As shown in FIG. 129, FIG. 130, and the like, the lifting slit 3540 is formed at the same height at both ends extending left and right, and is located on the upper side extending left and right and closer to the right side from the left end in front view. Has a lock projection 3540a protruding downward. The lock projection 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the left side when viewed from the front is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the left end of the lifting slit 3540, and the right side when viewed from the front is the lifting slit. It is formed in a straight line extending obliquely toward the left end of a portion slightly extending leftward from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of 3540. The lower side extending to the left and right of the lifting slit 3540 is formed in a shape following the upper side so as to form a substantially constant interval with the upper side.

  The elevating unit 3502 of the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 includes a flat unit base 3550 attached to the front surface of the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 and the back of the back-under-front front decorative body unit 3501 between the unit base 3550 and the unit base 3550. A rotating shaft protrudes between the base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 with a gap that can accommodate a lower part than the front first decorative body 3510, and the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A second back-front drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, and a spur gear-like second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotation shaft of the second back-front front drive motor 3552; It is meshed with the second drive gear 3553 and rotated by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A second transmission gear 3554 that is attached to the second transmission gear, an arc-shaped second lifting gear 3555a meshing with the second transmission gear 3554, and a substantially semicircular and flat plate-shaped main body portion 3555b concentric with the arc of the second lifting gear 3555a. A shaft hole 3555c that passes through the center of the main body 3555b and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arm 3555d that extends from the main body 3555b in a direction away from the second elevating gear 3555a. A unit lift arm 3555 having a cylindrical shape, and a columnar shape that is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit lift arm 3555 from the front and is slidably inserted into the lift slit 3540 of the front lower back decorative body unit 3501. Unit lift pin 3556a, front end of unit lift pin 3556a A flat plate-like connecting piece 3556b extending toward the shaft hole 3555c along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555, and projecting rearward from the front end of the connecting piece 3556b, the rear end of the main body portion 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555b. An arm reinforcing member 3556 having an attachment boss 3556c attached to the front surface.

  The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat detection piece 3553a that extends outward. The unit lifting arm 3555 is attached to the unit base 3550 so as to rotate about the position near the upper part from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Unit lift arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from shaft hole 3555c to the tip of arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of second lift gear 3555a.

  Further, the lifting unit 3502 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550, and is attached to the unit lifting detection sensor 3557 capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and to the right end portion in front view on the front surface of the unit base 3550. A vertically extending slide base 3558, a vertically extending bar-like intermediate slider 3559 attached to the front side of the slide base 3558, and a front side of the intermediate slider 3559 slidably attached to the front side. And a mounting slider 3560 extending vertically to be attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501.

  In this elevating unit 3502, a front lower back second drive motor 3552, a second drive gear 3553, a second transmission gear 3554, a unit elevating arm 3555, an arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556 a), a slide base 3558, and an intermediate slider 3559. , And the mounting slider 3560 constitute a decorative body unit lifting mechanism 3502A that lifts and lowers the lower back front decorative body unit 3501.

  Further, the elevating unit 3502 has a proximal end rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, penetrates forward and backward, extends toward the distal end, and is inserted with the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501. A guide arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a and a guide bush 3538 which is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561 from the rear and into which the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm presser attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 that rotatably supports the rear face of the base end side of the guide arm 3561. 3564, arm presser 3564 and spring Over scan both ends and 3563 is provided with an assist spring 3565 which urges the respective attached and the direction in which the Ahemu presser 3564 and spring-based 3563 approach each other, the. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 in the upper left position of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front, and the tip end side extends to the right.

  The back left lower decoration unit 3503 of the front back movable production unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front, and has a three-dimensional decoration imitating “Mahjong” “牌” on the front. And a back lower left decorative board 3561 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 behind the lower left lower decorative body 3560 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. The back left bottom decorative unit 3503 can light up and decorate the back left bottom decorative body 3560 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back left bottom decorative substrate 3561 to emit light. The bottom left decoration unit 3503 is positioned behind the side unit 2300 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and can illuminate the vicinity of the side unit top 2300 in the game area 5a.

  The lower back middle decorative unit 3504 of the front lower front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the left side of the front surface of the base cover 3551 from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed with a decoration of “Dokun” characters. And a lower back middle decorative body 3570 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the lower back middle decorative body 3570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back lower middle decoration unit 3504 can light-decorate the lower back middle decorative body 3570 by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the back lower middle decorative board 3571. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is positioned between the lower side unit 2200 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a when assembled in the game board 5.

  The back left bottom ball guiding unit 3505 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 can guide and discharge the game balls received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit bottom 2200 downward. This back left lower sphere guiding unit 3505 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 whose front surface is open, and a transparent flat plate shape which closes the front surface of the passage member 3580 which is open. A cover 3581 and a side rear decorative board 3582 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 is attached. In addition, the back left lower sphere guiding unit 3505 is positioned behind the side unit lower 2200 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the side unit lower 2200 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the side rear decorative board 3582. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The back bottom front relay board 3506 of the back back front movable production unit 3500 includes a back bottom front first decorative board 3513, a back bottom front second decorative board 3522, a back bottom front first drive motor 3528, a decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535, Backside front second drive motor 3552, unit up / down detection sensor 3557, back left bottom decoration board 3561, back bottom middle decoration board 3571, side rear decoration board 3582, and stage drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 The connection is relayed.

  Next, the operation of the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the like, the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 has the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the descending end and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 in a normal state. The back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged so as to descend and is positioned in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the front lower front decorative body 3510 faces forward.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 129, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit lifting arm 3555 of the lifting unit 3502 is positioned below the shaft hole 3555c, and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d. The unit lifting pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the lifting slit 3540 of the lower front decorative body unit 3501 is located in the vicinity of the right end of the lifting slit 3540 in the front view. Further, the guide arm 3561 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state of extending substantially horizontally with its tip directed rightward in front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the front back decorative unit 3501 is located at the left end in the front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevation detection sensor 3557.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body lifting arm 3553 in the second lower decorative body 3520 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 has a state in which the tip side extends downward from the rotation center. The decorative body raising / lowering pin 3515 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body lifting arm 3553 is located at the end of the slit 3533a on the side near the rotation center. Yes. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the first backside decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535 of the second backside front decorative body 3520.

  In this normal state, in the assembled state on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the front-view main liquid crystal display device 1600 and behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500, and the back lower front decorative body unit A first front decorative member 3511 of the front lower back first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is positioned above the stage 2530.

  Under normal conditions, the unit elevating arm 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554 by the second drive motor 3552 in front of the back and bottom of the elevating unit 3502. Then, the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves in a direction to rise around the shaft hole 3555c. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a presses the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 rises. Since the front lower right decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 through the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the attachment slider 3560, the right end portion in front view rises straight without tilting.

  As the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 to the left in the front view. When the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left as viewed from the front of the portion of the lock protrusion 3540a that protrudes downward in the elevating slit 3540, the driving of the lower back front second drive motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the drive unit 3502 (decorating body unit elevating mechanism 3502A) (first ascending position). ) (See FIG. 131 (b)).

  In this state, the tip (unit lifting pin 3556a) of the arm portion 3555d of the unit lifting arm 3555 is located on the upper right in front of the rotation center (shaft hole 3555c) of the unit lifting arm 3555. Due to the weight of the front decorative body unit 3501, a rotational moment is applied to the tip of the arm portion 3555d so as to rotate the unit elevating arm 3555 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And as shown in FIG.130 (c), in the left side surface of the lock protrusion 3540a with which the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a is in contact with the upper side of the lifting slit 3540, the part on the right side with respect to the part in contact is Since it has entered inside the boundary line L (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) of the swivel range of the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a, in order to revolve so that the lock projection 3540a moves downward, the intruding part The lock protrusion 3540a (the back lower front decorative body unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 so that the head moves outside the boundary line L of the turning range. The rotational moment acting on the lift pins 3556a is canceled out, and the unit lift arm 3555 does not rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, It is maintained (locked) in a state positioned.

  In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the ascending end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is assembled to the center board 2500 in a front view when assembled to the game board 5. It becomes the state located in the frame, and the decoration of the first front decoration member 3511 of the back lower front first decoration body 3510 can be seen well from the player side.

  Subsequently, with the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first front drive gear 3529 and the first transmission gear 3530 are transmitted by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. When the decorative body lifting arm 3533 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first lifting gear 3532, the slit 3533a of the decorative body lifting arm 3533 causes the slit 3533a to enter the slit 3533a. The first hinge part 3514 and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 are moved forward and upward so that the decorative body lifting pin 3515 of the inserted back lower front first decorative body 3510 is pushed forward. The back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated around the second hinge part 3524.

  When the decorative body lifting / lowering arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the rotation of the first lower back front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the first lower back front first decorative body 3510 moves the second lower back front second decorative body 3510. It will be in the state located above the decoration body 3520 (a raise position or an open position). In this state, the first front decoration member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 that was initially facing forward is in a state of facing rear, and instead, the rear lower front second decorative body 3520 is facing backward. The second back decorative member 3512 facing the second decorative member 3521 is located above the second decorative member 3521 and the front surface thereof is substantially flush with the second decorative member 3521 and faces forward. Thereby, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form a single large decoration (decoration of the letter “Wo”) (FIG. 131 ( see c)).

  In a state where the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is raised and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is opened by rotating the ascending hinge, the center accessory 2500 is assembled in the game board 5 in the front view. The substantially lower half of the frame (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed with the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 141).

  As described above, the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 is maintained in a state where the back-under-front front decorative body unit 3501 is stopped at the rising end position even when the back-under-front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load acting on the second drive motor 3552 in front of the lower back. Further, since the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a that revolves in the upward direction is locked in the middle, when the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is There is no unnatural movement that falls, and the player can enjoy the movement of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501.

  Further, in the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, as the operation of raising the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending in the left and right directions so as to be lifted. Compared with the case where it is made to do, since the site | part of the back bottom front 1st decoration body 3510 visible from a player side changes every moment, it can be made conspicuous and can attract a player's interest strongly. By opening the back lower front first decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation, the first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 that cannot be seen in a normal state. The second decorative member 3521 can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141. FIG. 132 shows a state in which the first decorative body after back and the second decorative body after back are rotated together at the normal position in the movable production unit after the back unit of the back unit and the second decorative surface is directed to the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 133 shows the first decorative surface of the first back and bottom decorative body, with the first back and rear second decorative body of the back and rear movable decorative unit of the back unit closed and the first decorative surface of the first back and bottom decorative body facing the front. And slide it to the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area, and slide the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body to the approximate center in the left and right direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating the first rear decorative body and the second rear rear decorative body that are opened by rotating the first rear rear decorative body of the back and rear movable production unit from the state of FIG. With the decorative surface facing the front, the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable production unit is opened by rotating the hinge and the rear upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the rear upper left second decorative body first It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where two decorative members are directed to the front. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating the first rear decorative body and the second rear rear decorative body that are opened by rotating the rear lower first decorative body of the rear rear movable movable production unit from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the decorative surface is directed to the front.

  FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end in front view. FIG. 137 is a front view counterclockwise so that the back upper middle decorative body unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit in the rear unit is moved to the position of the descending end and the rear upper middle decorative body unit extends obliquely downwardly in the front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state rotated in the surrounding direction. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to the half open intermediate open position. FIG. 139 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to the fully opened position. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board showing the front back front decorative body unit of the back back front movable effect unit positioned at the rising end. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back lower front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 140 and raised above the back lower front second decorative body.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. , It can be seen well from the player side (front). In this normal state, the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 of the back unit 3000, which can be rotated by the hinge, are closed, and the back bottom back first decorative body is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 faces forward so that it can be seen from the player side, and the display of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

  In a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are rotated by the hinge rotation of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. In the folded state in which the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is positioned in front of the fixed decorative member 3211, the back decorative body is positioned behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050, which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. The front side is obstructed from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050 so as not to be visible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable rendering unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 that is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the normal state, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front view center accessory 2500 faces forward in a visible manner.

  Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is moved forward of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In the state of being folded down to the side, the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is a lower end lower than the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that it does not face forward from within the frame of the center accessory 2500 Is located.

  This game board 5 is located behind the back unit 3000 in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, the rear left movable effect unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effects and light emission effects). .

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back and bottom movable movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back and back second decorative body 3120 is viewed in a plan view by the back and back back second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. The second decorative surface 3122 facing backward is turned to the front by rotating in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 132). At this time, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 which is closed and positioned in front of the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 and the back bottom back first decorative body 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A portion of the displayed effect image is blocked, and the second backside decorative body 3120 can be made conspicuous, and “Tenun” applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the second backside decorative body 3120. ”Can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can feel that there is something good, and the expectation of the game can be increased.

  In addition, as an effect (movable effect) using the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable effect unit 3100 has a third rear surface behind the slide unit 3150. The drive motor 3155 slidably moves the rotary drive unit 3130 to the left end position when viewed from the front while the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed. The first backside back first decorative body 3110 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the backside back first drive motor 3134 so that the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 are back upper left first by the rear upper left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. The first decorative member 3221 is closed with respect to the decorative body 3210 and is slid to the right end of the front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 (see FIG. 133).

  In the state shown in FIG. 133, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 are pivoted vertically and the back upper left The axis extending vertically to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is located on the same axis and located on the left and right sides of the game area 5a. It almost coincides with the center of the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a state where the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged obliquely within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. Located in front of. Thereby, a player can be surprised by the movement to the center side of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the appearance of the back top left second decorative body 3220.

  Then, in the state in which the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back top left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state in FIG. 133), the rotational drive unit 3130 in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. The back back first decorative body 3110 folded by the back bottom back first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back bottom back second decorative body 3120, The back lower back first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is provided. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, A back on the left second decorative body fixing decorative member 3211 side by side 3220 on the right side of the first decorative body 3210 directs the second decorative member 3222 on the front (see Figure 134).

  In the state of FIG. 134, the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, and the back top left movable effect unit 3200 are lined on the left and right. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are joined together in the vertical direction at the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The front of the display screen is substantially covered. In addition, the first back and rear first decorative body 3110 and the second back and rear second decorative body 3120 of the rear back and rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front, and the back upper and left movable effect unit 3200 Due to the decorations applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the vertically written characters “Kangsei” are displayed as the player. It becomes visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body appears in the frame of the center object 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), which has a great impact on the player and a chance of “hit game” or the like. It is possible to strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and to increase the expectation for the game.

  By the way, although the above demonstrated the effect which opens the back back lower 1st decoration body 3110 of the back back lower movable unit 3100 and the back upper left second decoration body 3220 of the back upper left movable production unit 3200 simultaneously, As indicated by 135, only the first back-behind first decorative body 3110 of the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. Thereby, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 are opened by hinge rotation first, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front. And the letter “Holy” will be visible first. At this time, since the cut decoration 3170 such as “I” is provided above the character “St.”, the decoration that forms a set for the player to complete the cut decoration 3170 on the upper side is provided. (The cut decoration 3260) can be recognized, and whether or not the decoration of the pair appears (whether or not the second upper decoration body 3220 on the back opens by rotating the hinge) This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the appearance position on the right in the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 located immediately behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in a front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500. And is visible from the player side (see FIG. 136). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in a region corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed at the rear, It is possible to make an illusion that the effect image is displayed within the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the drawing, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 in the back bottom back movable production unit 3100. When the decorative body 3320 is made to appear, the back left side is movable with the illusion that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so as to form a pair with the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) after the back side on the right side. It is possible to greatly enjoy the effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the first back of the first decorative body 3110.

  Further, as an effect using the back middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated counterclockwise by the second back drive motor 3443 of the back middle drive unit 3440. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 attached to the front end of the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, and the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3460 of the rear upper middle rotating body 3460 is driven by the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3463. Rotate 3410 to the pivot end in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back upper decorative body unit 3410 is positioned substantially at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the back upper decorative body unit 3410 extends obliquely with its right end side raised. (FIG. 137). As a result, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 descends to the center position while rotating. The unit 3410 can be noticed, and the movement of the back and middle decorative body unit 3410 in the form reminiscent of “Mahjong” 's “thousands of sticks” makes it seem that there is something good, and expects the game A feeling can be raised.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end and is obliquely extended, and then closed by the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410. A pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 138, between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are Because it is in a state of facing forward, the player can be reminded of the "Mahjong" "Five thousand sticks", which seems to have increased the possibility of "big hit game", expecting A feeling can be raised more.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 138, when the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are further slid in the direction away from each other by the back-upper middle first drive motor 3420, as shown in FIG. From among the middle first decorative bodies 3411 on the back side, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back middle second decorative body 3412 face forward. Because it is in a state, the player can be reminded of the “Mahjong” “Million sticks” and be convinced that the lottery result of the first or second lottery is a “hit” It is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, as an effect using the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-bottom-front first decorative body 3510 is hinged to the front of the back-bottom-front front second decorative body 3520 and folded. Then, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised from the lower end position to the upper end position by the second lower front drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502. In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the front lower back first decorative body 3510 can be seen well from the person side (see FIG. 140). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below and covers the lower part of the front surface of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance, and the game is expected to be expected. Can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decorative member 3511 of the first front decorative body 3511 below the back is provided with a decoration in which a plurality of “Mahjong” “牌” are arranged. By making the front decoration member 3511 rise and become visible, it is possible to entertain the player with the illusion that his / her own baskets are lined up.

  Then, in the state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body lifting mechanism 3501A). When the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending in the left and right directions so that the lower back front first decorative body 3510 ascends and is positioned above the lower back front second decorative body 3520, the back lower front that has not been seen so far The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 are arranged vertically. In this state, when viewed from the front, the substantially lower half of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed with the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520. Thus, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form a single large decoration (decoration of the letter “Wo”) (FIG. 141). See). As a result, the first table decoration member 3511 with a decoration in which a plurality of “Mahjong tiles” are arranged on the left and right is hinged around the axis extending to the left and right, and the word “Kazunori” means “upward”. Because of the decoration, the player can be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn for the player is “big hit”, and the interest in the occurrence of “big hit game” is interesting. Can be increased.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the gaming machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the release of the game ball by rotating the handle lever 504.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a gaming ball passing through the gate 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning opening 2005 A first top prize opening sensor 2114, a second top prize opening 2006a as a second big prize opening 2006, and a second top prize opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower prize opening 2006b; Detection signals from the second lower grand prize opening sensor 2557, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. It is input via the port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid. 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and a first special symbol display, a second special symbol display, and a first special symbol memory display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to the second special symbol memory display, the normal symbol display, the normal symbol memory display, the game status indicator, the round indicator, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second upper big prize port sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize port. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened and game balls frequently enter, The detection of game balls by the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and a long life are also used for the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3015.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Or transmitted to the control unit 1511. The main control MPU will be described in detail later, but when receiving various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout and a launch solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that cancels an error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, a tank rail 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the apparatus 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. The

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball check” (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830 are in mesh with the payout blade 839 and the game ball so that the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate)) "Is displayed Is a “counting switch error” (specifically, a failure has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number “5” is displayed. “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, “full” (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full) and the number “7” is displayed. When “CR is not connected” is notified (the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number “9” is displayed It has informed the message indicating "stock" (specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined for the game ball is not paid out).

  The ball rental request signal for the game ball from the ball rental button 332 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is omitted in detail, but a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507. In response to this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the ball. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 540 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 680 by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 even when the power is shut off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the gaming board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 or a door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and each device of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light emission data composed of door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the substrate is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I / O. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting to 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 of the effect operation unit 220 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and plays music and music adapted to various effects from the speakers 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal as sound information) is sent to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of data different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the flashing signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the effect drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but as a microprocessor. Display control MPU, display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling display of main liquid crystal display device 1600 and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and main liquid crystal Image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper liquid crystal display device 244, and image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM are transferred and copied And.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. The non-resident area transfer data includes various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate are extracted. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites are overlapped with each other. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially perform main scanning that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction crossing the one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as the sub-scan, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, on the basis of the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially applied from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each minute pixel.

[7. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 81, FIG. 87, FIG. 92, FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball that has been thrown into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. That is, a game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When a game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front surface of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down while abutting on the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory passes through the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523.

  The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. From either of them. When a game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and thus the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The ball is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received at the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the opened first big winning port 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center object 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility of being received in 2001, the first start port 2002, or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, a game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven into) the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ) And enters the right upper distribution space 2541 of the right hit game area 2540. In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted, and a game ball abuts against the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper portion, and a second start opening 2004 that is closed by a general winning opening 2001 and a second start opening door member 2549 is provided at the lower portion.

  The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game balls that have entered the lower right circulation space 2543 are the second upper prize opening that closes the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower prize winning opening 2006b, which are lined up on the left and right as the second prize winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower grand prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a that forms the bottom surface, and enters the game area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side when viewed from the front. Released. The downstream end (release plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100, and the first big prize opening 2005 is open. When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received at the first big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of speed reduction ribs 2546. In rare cases, the lower right circulation space 2543 may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is played in the game area 5a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

  When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is a normal random number that is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one ordinary random number from the list and comparing the obtained ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the normal lottery result of this normal lottery becomes “normal hit” when the time-shorting control described later is not executed, the second start door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, The start port 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, it is determined whether the “normal hit” is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. If the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second start port door member 2549 By turning in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period of time. Opening / closing control is made a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5) by turning counterclockwise and closing the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2004. ) Times. In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per 1st normal”, the second start port 2004 is set to be in a state where the game ball can be received, and “0.3 second” is set as the five periods. , “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per second ordinary” The second start port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be received five times, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”. When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per third ordinary”, the second starting port 2004 is allowed to accept game balls. The period is “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “1.1 second”, “per second ordinary” and “third ordinary” Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol variation display performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate part 2003, the normal symbol variation display is started after the normal symbol variation display is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). At the second start port 2004, the second start port door member 2549 is rotated and opened after the normal variation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of the time-shortening control which will be described later, control for shortening the normal variation time is executed as compared with normal (a state where time-shortening control is not executed). Further, the opening time for turning the second start port door member 2549 to open the second start port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time reduction control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a longer time as compared with the case where the time reduction control is executed.

  In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, until a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is added to the gate unit. After passing 2003, the normal symbol display cannot be started again on the normal symbol display. Therefore, the normal symbol change display is started until the previous normal symbol change display ends (the normal lottery result). Until the suggestion is over). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the normal symbol variation display can be started. Until normal symbols change display starts. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 and the upper limit is discarded even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”) is obtained by acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table. , “Small hit”, etc.) are generated for the first special lottery result. Then, the first special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after variably displaying the first special symbol). In addition, the first special lottery result that is drawn by accepting a game ball at the first starting port 2002 includes “out of”, “small hit”, “2R positive variable big hit”, “8R positive variable big hit”, “8R normal There are “big hit” and “10R probable big hit”, and the obtained first special random number is collated with the big hit determination table to determine which one of these is true, and further after normal big hit game (low probability state: this example In this example, the probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probabilistic variation state) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) is about 1/44 in this example. (If you win a big hit with the probability of) (whether or not it is a promising big hit), and at least if the first special lottery result is out of place, execute the time-short control (time-short state) to shorten the fluctuation time than usual Whether or not Time reduction big hit or not) and the period for executing the time-shortening control: the (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of “small hit” is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

  Further, when a game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. The second special random number is acquired, and the acquired second special random number is collated with a predetermined jackpot determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “small hit”, etc. ) To generate the second special lottery result. Then, the second special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after variably displaying the second special symbol). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting a game ball at the second starting port 2004 includes “out of”, “2R positive variation big hit”, “2R normal big hit”, “4R positive big hit”, “5R The 2nd special acquired is "Probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R probable big hit", "16R probable big hit 1", "16R probable big hit 2", "16R probable big hit 3" By comparing the random number against the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game than normal (low probability state: in this example winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/395) Whether or not to execute probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability variation state): in this example, winning the jackpot with a probability of about 1/44 in this example) to improve the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Jackpot ), And at least whether or not to execute the time-shortening control (time-shortening state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when the result of the second special lottery is off (whether or not the time-shortage hit) and the period of time-shortening control ( The number of time reductions: special symbols (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol)) are also discriminated.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the predetermined fluctuation time, display the eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) in the lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big prize opening Either 2005 or the second grand prize winning hole 2006 is in a state where a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of games from 830 (in this example, 11 if a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or 15 if a game ball is accepted in the second big prize opening 2006) The ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, when the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006 are capable of receiving game balls, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 accept many game balls. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit (2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit)”, the first big prize opening 2005 is played for a predetermined time (in this example, 0.6 seconds). An open / close pattern for closing the game ball in an unacceptable state for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example) is repeated a plurality of times (in this example, twice) after the open state is made acceptable. That is, when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit (2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit)”, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a short time to play the first big winning opening 2005. It is difficult to accept the ball, and an advantageous gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball is generated.

  On the other hand, the special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R big hit (8R exact variation big hit, 8R normal big hit)”, “10R exact variation big hit”, In the case of “16R probability variation 1”, the number of times the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is set to the first big prize opening 2005 for a predetermined time (in this example, 29 seconds) An open state in which game balls can be received until seven game balls are received (in this example) or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received in the second grand prize opening 2006 After that, the first big prize opening 2005 is closed for a predetermined time (in this example, 2.0 seconds) or the game ball cannot be received, or the second big prize opening 2006 is set for a predetermined time (in this example, 1.0 seconds) Closing pattern to unacceptable closed state (referred to as 1 round single opening pattern) is repeated a predetermined number of times (the predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 times (4 rounds) for “4R probable big hit”, 5 times (5 rounds) for “5R probable big hit”, and 16 times (16 rounds) for “1 for 16R probable big hit”, respectively. Thus, an advantageous gaming state (in this case, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player is generated. That is, the special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R big variation (8R exact variation big hit, 8R normal big hit)”, “10R exact variation big hit”, In the case of “16R probability variation big hit 1”, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to be opened for a long time, so that the game balls are received into the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006. The player can acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time because a big hit that can be obtained easily and award balls can be generated.

  Also, when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (in this example, 0.6 seconds) and can be received for a predetermined time. The control for setting the game ball in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received over (in this example, 2.0 seconds) is repeatedly executed a plurality of times (in this example, six times), or is determined in advance to the second big prize opening 2006. The opening / closing pattern executed until the number (10 in this example) of game balls is received is repeated 16 times (over 16 rounds). In the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, first, the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close at a timing at which one game ball can be received in the second big prize place 2006. After that, the process of controlling the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 2006 is repeated five times at a timing when two game balls can be received in the second big prize opening 2006. That is, when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time multiple times in one round, but the second big prize opening 2006 is changed. A big hit that can receive a prize ball by accepting a game ball is generated. Therefore, when the result of the special lottery is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, it becomes possible to accept more than 10 game balls that can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 during one round, After opening the two major winning openings 2006 for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example), or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received, From “16R probability variation big hit 1” that repeats a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) an opening / closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is closed for a predetermined period of time (in this example, 1.0 second). It is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls (by obtaining a lot of 15 prize balls per round, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 240 prize balls than "1 per 16R probability variation"). it can). Thus, in this example, even when the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, not only can the number of winning balls be more than the number of game balls to be shot, but also a large number of winning balls in a short period of time. Therefore, even when the second big prize opening 2006 becomes a big hit that is controlled to be opened for a short time, the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower major prize winning opening 2006b of the second big winning prize opening 2006b have a lateral width within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower big prize winning opening 2006b are controlled to open after 2.0 seconds from being closed, the horizontal direction in the upper part of the center accessory 2500 is formed. A game ball that has entered the second upper prize winning opening 2006a while the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower great prize winning opening 2006b are closed by being driven to the right in front of the center is second. Before finishing the rolling of both the upper university winning opening 2006a and the second lower university winning opening 2006b, the second upper university winning opening 2006a and the second lower university winning opening 2006b can be controlled to be in an open state. Kamidai prize opening 2006a and second bottom It can be ball entrance to the second on special winning opening the special winning hole 2006a on all second entry the game balls onto 2006a and the second lower special winning opening inside 2006b in a closed state of the winning openings 2006b. Also, in this example, the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower major prize winning opening 2006b are set to 2.0 seconds from the closed state to the open state, so that the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second upper prize winning opening 2006b The second upper prize winning port 2006a and the second lower major prize winning port 2006b can be changed from the closed state to the open state in a state where a game ball has entered each of the two lower great prize winning ports 2006b. As a result, although the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, it is possible to realize the entry of two game balls per round. Note that the period from when the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are closed to the open state is not limited to the above-mentioned 2.0 seconds, and at least eight rounds of big hit games are played. After being started (until the game ball accepted in the second big prize opening 2006 is fired in the 16th round), the ball launcher 680 continues to drive the game ball into the second attacker passage 2543a. In this case, when the game ball has entered the second upper grand prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b, the second upper major prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b are closed from the closed state. What is necessary is just to set it as the period which can be set as an open state.

  In the above-described example, when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 2”, the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined time (in this example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the control for making the game ball in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example) is repeatedly executed a plurality of times (6 times in this example) or to the second big prize opening 2006 The opening / closing pattern is executed until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is received, but the second number is set so that more than 10 game balls can be entered. The present invention is not limited to this as long as the winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close, and by providing a plurality of short-time opening control intervals, or by executing a combination of long-time opening control and short-time opening control. Is also feasible. For example, after the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for 0.6 seconds so that game balls can be received, the game balls are closed for 2.0 seconds so that two game balls can be Two winning a prize control that enables acceptance into the two big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 in an open state in which a gaming ball can be received for 0.6 second, and then the gaming ball is held for 1.0 second. A single winning control that allows one game ball to be received in the second grand prize opening 2006 as a closed state that cannot be accepted is executed in one round (for example, less than nine in the second big prize opening 2006) In the state in which only one game ball has been entered, one winning control is executed once, otherwise two winning control is executed), so that a maximum number of 10 predetermined in one round is determined. The second grand prize opening so that more than 11 game balls can be entered 006 may be controlled to open and close, or after the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds), or nine game balls are received in the second big prize opening 2006 The second big prize opening 2006 is closed for 2.0 seconds so that no game balls can be received, and then the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for 0.6 seconds. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (referred to as one round of opening / closing pattern) 16 times (over 16 rounds), the number of 11 pieces exceeding the predetermined maximum number of 10 pieces in one round You may make it control opening / closing of the 2nd big winning opening 2006 so that a game ball can enter.

  In addition, the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower great prize winning opening 2006b are placed on the second upper big prize winning opening 2006b and the second lower big prize winning opening 2006b within a period from the closing state to the opening state. An on-wing rolling sensor capable of detecting a rolling game ball may be provided. In this case, detection by the on-wing rolling sensor and the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize winning opening. You may make it perform the production | presentation according to the number of game balls which can be entered in the 2nd big winning opening 2006 estimated from the timing which opens 2006b.

  If the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the second big prize opening 2006 is played for a predetermined time (in this example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (in this example, 10). An opening / closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is closed so that the game ball cannot be received for a predetermined time (in this example, 1.0 second) after the game ball is opened until the ball is received. Is repeated 7 times (7 rounds), and the second big prize opening 2006 is played for a predetermined time (in this example, 29 seconds) or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received. After the ball is in an open state in which the ball can be received (after 8 rounds have been executed), the second big prize opening 2006 is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example). Then, at the second big prize opening 2006 An open / close pattern in which the game ball is closed in an unacceptable state for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example) after the game ball is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball (0.6 seconds in this example). Repeat 8 times (over the remaining 8 rounds). In the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close at a timing at which two game balls can be received in the second big prize place 2006. It is like that. In other words, in the first 8 rounds out of 16 rounds, it is possible to easily obtain a prize ball by opening the second big prize opening 2006 for a long time as in the case where the special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 1”. In addition to being controlled, the remaining eight winning rounds control the opening and closing of the second grand prize opening 2006 only once in one round, but the game balls are accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 and awarded A big hit that can be earned is generated.

  As described above, the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern for controlling the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time) executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit (2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit)” ) In practice, it is difficult to allow a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and no winning ball can be expected. On the other hand, the special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R big hit (8R exact variation big hit, 8R normal big hit)”, “10R positive variation big hit” ”,“ Opening / closing pattern executed in the case of 16R probability variation big hit 1 ”(the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time or the first big prize winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either a certain number (7 in this example) of game balls is accepted, or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is accepted into the second big prize opening 2006. When the condition is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state) makes it easy to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 and win the prize ball. Is possible You have me.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged in the left and right, and the second big prize winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, almost all of the game balls flowing down in the second attacker passage 2543a by right-handing are received in the second big prize opening 2006. For example, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are in an open state so that a game ball can be received and then cannot be received (the second large winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time). Or it is closed (closed) by satisfying a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls to be received in the second grand prize opening 2006, and can be received next. Even if the game ball passes over the second upper prize opening 2006a until it becomes (opened) (during the interval), the second upper prize prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize winning opening again. By opening 2006b and allowing the game ball to be received, the game ball that has passed over the second upper prize opening 2006a in the closed state can be reliably received at the second lower prize opening 2006b. It has become.

  The special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R big hit (8R exact variation big hit, 8R normal big hit)”, “10R exact variation big hit”, In the case of “16R probability variation big hit 1” and “16R probability variation big hit 3 first half 8 rounds”, the interval from closing the second big prize opening 2006 to opening again is 1.0 second, right The game balls that flow down in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting are prevented from increasing in circulation speed by the plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546. A game ball may pass over the second upper prize winning port 2006a and reach the second lower major prize winning port 2006b or between the second upper major prize winning port 2006a and the second lower major prize winning port 2006b. Sex is low, so that the game ball flowing down the inside of second attacker passage 2543a by right-handed is received in substantially all the second on special winning opening 2006a.

  On the other hand, when the special lottery results are “16R probability variation big hit 2” and “16R probability variation big hit 3 latter half 8 rounds”, the interval from the second big prize opening 2006 to the closed state is again set to 2.0. Since the second second winning prize opening 2006 is closed and then opened again, the second upper winning prize opening 2006a is passed over the second lower winning prize opening 2006b, or two up. There is a high possibility that a game ball will reach between the big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b. That is, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened again, almost all the game balls that have flowed down in the second attacker 2543a by right-handing are accepted into the second lower big prize opening 2006b. Note that, as described above, in this example, since the game ball is shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the handle lever 504 is rotated to the right, the second big prize opening 2006 is closed and then opened again. Game balls that pass over the second upper prize opening 2006a and reach between the second lower prize opening 2006b or between the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b. Is likely to reach the second upper prize winning opening 2006a or near the second upper prize winning opening 2006a. Therefore, the second half of “16R probability variation big hit 2” and “16R probability variation big hit 3” that execute short-time release control in which the interval from when the second big prize opening 2006 is closed to when it is opened again is 2.0 seconds. In “8 rounds”, it is possible to enter one game ball in each of the second upper major prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b in one round.

  In the above-described example, in the case of “big hit” in which the second big prize opening 2006 is used, both the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are controlled to be opened in one round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least when the opening / closing pattern for controlling the opening of the second big prize opening 2006 for a long period of time is executed, the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006 are performed in one round. Only one of the winning opening 2006b may be controlled to open. In this case, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are alternately controlled to be opened every round. Also good. For example, the special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R big hit (8R exact variation big hit, 8R normal big hit)”, “10R exact variation big hit”, In the case of “16R probability variation big hit 1” and “16R probability variation big hit 3 first half 8 rounds”, the first round (1R) can accept game balls with the second top big prize opening 2006a open, and cannot accept them. On the other hand, the second lower big prize opening 2006b may be opened and the next round (2R round) in which the game ball can be received may be started. In this way, the second upper prize winning port 2006a and the second lower major prize winning port 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds of digestion. Either one of the winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be received without fail. Therefore, when the player hits right in this state and distributes the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, The game ball is surely received in the second grand prize opening 2006, and it is possible to entertain the player without losing the game ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of some of the above-mentioned types of big hits, whether or not to execute the time-shortening control after completion of the big hit game is made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is 8R normal big hit in the time-short state (state where time-short control is executed), the time-short control is executed after the big hit game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state in which the time reduction control is executed), the time reduction control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are executed after the big hit game in the low-probability non-short-time state (both probability improvement control and time-shortage control are not executed: also referred to as normal state). In the case of 2R probability variable big hit, the time-shortening control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time reduction control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. In the case of a big hit, the short time control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display by the reception of the game ball at the first start port 2002 and the reception of the game ball at the second start port 2004 are the first. The change display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol indicators is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator is stopped and displayed (the first special lottery result is suggested) by receiving the game ball at the first starting port 2002 and The first start until the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by receiving the game ball at the second start port 2004 is stopped (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is received at the mouth 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol variable display. Since it is not possible to change the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the end of the variable symbol display of the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (first special lottery) Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery are complete ) Is set to be pending. More specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until it becomes possible to start the variable display of symbols. In addition, the upper limit of the number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 respectively. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being put on hold. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are turned on / off repeatedly for a predetermined time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and a special lottery result is suggested by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop.

  On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols (in this example, “1” to “9”) are arranged in a plurality of columns (for example, left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right The display of the variation of each decorative symbol sequence is started in the displayed state (three rows of decorative symbols), and then stopped and displayed sequentially (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in this order). ) Finally, when all the decorative symbol sequences are stopped, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped symbols is suggested to the player. It has come to be. In other words, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize is generated, a plurality of decorative symbol sequences fluctuate. An effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) after being displayed is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center object 2500, the back left side according to the lottery special lottery result The interior decoration unit 3050, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are used as appropriate. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) used for the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. Random numbers, second special random numbers), variable random numbers used for lottery processing for the variable time required for the variable symbol display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) Reach (decoration display of the left decoration design and the right decoration design in the same design and the middle decoration design is not yet stopped display in the variation display of the decoration design executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Reach random numbers used for lottery processing to determine whether or not to decorate the right decorative symbols so that they all become the same symbol), if the big hit is determined based on the special random number Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) used for lottery processing for determining the class, subject to lottery processing related to winning when the second start door member 2549 becomes an operation trigger It has a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second top big prize port sensor 2554, the first Detection signals from various switches such as the two lower prize winning hole sensors 2557 and the general winning opening sensor 3015 are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a win as an operation trigger of the second start door member 2549 as the process of step S15. . Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Also, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second start port door member 2549 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. (So-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the normal variation time required for displaying the normal symbol is reduced, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit is made, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the second starting port 2004 and increasing the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 outputs information such as hit information (16R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18 next. Process.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the big prize opening sensor 2554, the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the on state, the above-mentioned payout control is performed so that the prize balls corresponding to these signals are paid out to the player. A payout control command is output to the substrate 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of holds as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 2104. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2551 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit control for controlling the big hit game is performed. A process (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “2R probability variable big hit”, “8R normal big hit”, and “8R probability variable big hit”. On the basis of this, the first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close, and the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close based on the fact that “10R probability change big hit” is suggested. Also, based on the fact that the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “2R normal jackpot”, the first grand prize winning port 2005 is controlled to open and close, and “4R Based on the fact that it has become a mode that suggests "probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R probable big hit", and "16R probable big hit" 2006 is controlled to open and close. Also, when the jackpot game is ended based on the fact that the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped has become a mode suggesting “10R probability variable big hit”, and the variation of the second special symbol The results of lottery processing for the display mode when the display is stopped suggests "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", "7R probability variation big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit" When the big hit game based on the fact that the game has been completed is terminated, the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol during the short time state has become a mode suggesting “8R probability variable big hit” Lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in a state other than the normal state when the jackpot game based on When the big hit game is ended based on the result of suggesting “2R probable big hit”, the time-short flag is set to execute the time-short control (time-short state control) until the next big hit. To do. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is ended based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the short-time state is a mode suggesting “8R normal jackpot”, after the jackpot game The special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) after the big hit game is set by setting "72" to the fluctuation number counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Time-shortening control (time-short state control) is performed until the number of fluctuations of two special symbols) reaches 72 times. In addition, when the big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during the time-short state has become a mode suggesting “2R normal big hit”, Depending on the lottery result, set any one of “18”, “36”, “54”, “72” in the variation counter and set the time-short flag to set a special symbol (first special symbol, Time-shortening control (time-short state control) is executed until the number of fluctuations of (2 special symbols) reaches the number corresponding to the second special lottery result among 18, 36, 54, and 72 times. A high probability flag is set when a big hit game based on a probable big hit (2R probable big hit, 4R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 7R probable big hit, 8R probable big big hit, 10R probable big big hit, 16R probable big big hit) By doing so, probability improvement control (control of high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high-probability short-time state if both the high-probability flag and the short-time flag are set, and sets the high-probability non-short-time state if only the high-probability flag is set without setting the time-shortage flag. Control, if only the short-time flag is set without setting the high-probability flag, control is made to the low-probability short-time state (so-called short-time state), and if neither the high-probability flag nor the short-time flag is set, the low probability Control to a non-time-short state (so-called normal state).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hitting control process, based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped has become a mode suggesting “small hit”. The first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close.

  If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2104 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S41, firstly, the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the variable display start of the first special symbol on hold. Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value obtained by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU is used as the random number thus obtained. To store.

  However, in the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display start of the first special symbol is not held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S42 to step S44, the start of variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU displays the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if the jackpot is a jackpot type, if the jackpot or jackpot is not hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the game effect mode to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the type (variation pattern type) before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2551 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the second special symbol hold number is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display start of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S54, each random number obtained in this way is used as a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. To store.

  However, if it is determined in step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not put on hold. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S52 to step S54, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A) and the acquired random number, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether the game is a big hit or a small hit by comparing the variable random numbers, the type of big hit if the big hit is reached, and the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if the big hit or the small hit is not reached The effect is executed or the type of game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that high probability state control is being executed is set. If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the first special random number. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it is a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152A) and is the same randomness as the jackpot determination value compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3937-3946) having a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 152 (A)) at a low probability described later and is compared with the first special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not it is a big hit, and the contents of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and this game By specifying the type of the fluctuation pattern indicating the period (fluctuation time) for performing the production, any one of “big hit 1-12”, which is a big hit as prior judgment information, “out of” and “reach 1-4” which are not big hits Can be classified. In this example, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the fluctuation pattern, normal reach fluctuation pattern, weak SP reach fluctuation pattern, and non-specific strong strong depending on the ratio of big hit (expected big hit value, also called big hit reliability). A plurality of types of variation patterns of SP reach variation patterns and specific strong SP reach variation patterns are provided (outgoing big hit expected value variation pattern <normal reach variation pattern <weak SP reach variation pattern <non-specific strong SP reach variation pattern <Specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). Further, the ratio of the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process in step S82 and the second variation pattern setting process in the second special symbol process process) described later and executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is inversely proportional to the expected value of jackpot (outgoing fluctuation pattern> normal reach fluctuation pattern> weak SP reach fluctuation pattern> non-specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern> specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the deviation fluctuation pattern is executed relatively frequently, while the specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern is rarely executed.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage processing, the same randomness is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. It is also specified whether or not a small hit is made by comparing the small hit determination value set to a numerical value with the first special random number. These small hit determination values (3800-3812) at the time of high probability or low probability are set in a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152A) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and are the first special random numbers. It is set to the same random number as the small hit determination value compared with. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the small hit is made, and the prior determination information includes “big hit 9 to 12” including the small hit. Can be classified.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed. If it is set, it is determined whether it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the second special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value is determined. Is compared with the second special random number to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in a high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 152A), which will be described later, and is the same randomness as the jackpot determination value compared with the second special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3937-3946) having a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 152 (A)) at a low probability described later and is compared with the second special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-12" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit It can be classified into either “out of” or “reach 1 to 4”.

  In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process that is executed based on the game ball received at the first start port 2002 is not executed in the time-saving state (time-shortening) in which the time-saving control is executed. Yes. On the other hand, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the game ball received at the second starting port 2004 is not executed in the non-time-short state (non-time-short time) in which the time-shortening control is not executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the non-time-short state is controlled, only the effect pre-determination process based on the game ball being received at the first start port 2002 is executed, and the time-short state is controlled. In this case, only the effect predetermination process based on the game ball being received at the second start port 2004 is executed.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the first special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination value indicating which big hit is to be determined. If you specify the type of jackpot by comparing the first design random number with the first symbol random number, and determine that it will be a big hit by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table, it will determine which jackpot The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, a determination value indicating that the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is obtained by matching with the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152C) described later, and the first symbol random number is set. It is set to the same random number as the judgment value (0-16) indicating that it becomes a big hit of specific 1 among the judgment values to be compared with, and it matches with the first special random number, so that the 8R probability variable big hit of specific 6 or not specified The determination value indicating that the 8R normal big hit is 2 is specified 6 or non-specific 2 among the determination values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152C) to be described later and compared with the first symbol random number. A determination value that is the same random value as the determination values (17-154, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit, and that indicates that it becomes a specific 7 10R probability variable big hit by matching with the first special random number, will be described later. Symbol determination table (Fig. 152 ( ) Has been determined value indicating that a jackpot particular 7 of the judgment value is set to the reference) is compared with the first symbol random number (155-159) the same random number.

  Similarly, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the second special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination indicating which big hit is made. If you specify the type of jackpot by comparing the value and the second symbol random number, and if you specify that it will be a jackpot by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table, indicate which jackpot The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that the 2R probability variation big hit of specific 1 or 2R normal big hit of non-specific 1 by matching with the second special random number is a symbol determination table described later (see FIG. 152C). Is set to the same random number as the determination value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number, Judgment value indicating that it matches the special 2 random 4R probability variation jackpot, the specified 3 5R probability variation jackpot, the specified 4 6R probability variation jackpot, the specified 5 7R probability variation jackpot, the specified 6 8R probability variation jackpot Is a determination value (20-55) that is set in a symbol determination table (to be described later) (see FIG. 152 (C)) and is a big hit of specific 2 to specific 6 among the determination values that are compared with the second symbol random number. And the same random value A determination value indicating that it becomes a 16R probability variation big hit of specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) by matching with another random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152C) described later. Among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number, the same random number value as the determination value (56-159) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3). In this example, there are three types of 16R probability variation jackpots, a specific 8-1, a specific 8-2, and a specific 8-3, in which the opening / closing mode of the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is different as the specific 8 16R probability variation big hit. In the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), specific 8-1, specific 8-2, and specific 8-3 having different opening / closing modes of the second big prize opening 2006 are collectively specified as 16R probability variation big hit of specific 8. It is supposed to be. Note that the prior determination table may be set so that it can be specified whether it is specified 8-1, specified 8-2, or specified 8-3. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect based on a more detailed result (a type of jackpot).

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is made, a plurality of types of reach effects are obtained by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed with a variable random number. Which of the reach productions is executed to identify the big hit. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 7 and the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) is a determination value that is compared with the variable random number. Is a random number that is the same as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed, and a determination value (5-) that indicates that the super reach effect (hereinafter also referred to as weak SP reach) with a low jackpot expectation degree is executed. 29) is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation is executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter referred to as this). (Referred to as “strong SP reach”), a determination value (30 to 216) indicating that a specific super reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is to be executed is a determination value that is compared with a variable random number. This is a random value that is the same as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level other than a specific super-reach effect is executed, and a specific super-reach effect is executed among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation level. The determination value (217-240) indicating that the action is to be performed is the same random number as the determination value indicating that the specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number.

  In addition, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the special 2-6 or non-specific 2 big hit is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is executed, is a super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (30-216) indicating that a non-specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level is a random number value that is the same as the determination value indicating that Of the determination values to be compared, the same random number value is used as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot that is not a specific super-reach effect is executed. A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among super-reach effects having a high degree of expectation indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  The determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 1 or the non-specific 1 is a determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (90-189) that is set to the same random number value and indicates that a super reach effect with a low degree of jackpot expectation is to be executed. The determination value (190-216) indicating that a non-specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level is compared with the random number. Among the determination values, the random number value is the same as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot that is not a specific super-reach effect is executed, A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high degree of expectation is determined by executing a specific super reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. It is set to the same random value as the determination value shown.

  For this reason, in step S61, the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number is compared with the prior determination table, and the variable random number is compared with the prior determination table. As information, “big hit 1” that is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) from normal reach, specific 7 or specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8− from weak SP reach) 3) “Big hit 2”, which is a big hit of 3), “Big hit 3”, which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "Big jackpot 4" as a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) from strong SP reach, "big hit 5" including special 2-6 or non-specific 2 big hits from normal reach From weak SP reach "Big jackpot 6" including specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 jackpots, "Big jackpot 7" including specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 jackpots from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach, specific “Big jackpot 8”, which includes specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 big hits from strong SP reach, “Big hit 9” as specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from normal reach, specific 1 or non from weak SP reach "Large 10", which is a big hit of a specific 1; "1 big hit 11", which is a specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, a specific 1 or non-specific from a specific strong SP reach It can be classified into any one of “big hit 12” which is a big hit of one.

  In addition, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is determined that a loss occurs, reach is displayed when a high probability flag indicating that control in a high probability state is executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change to indicate whether or not reach is displayed, it is determined whether or not the reach is displayed, and the control of the short time state (low probability short time state) is executed without the high probability flag set If only the time reduction flag indicating that the reach is set is set, whether or not the reach is displayed is determined by comparing the reach determination value at the time reduction indicating the display of the reach and the reach random number. When the probability flag and the time reduction flag are not set and the normal state control is being executed, the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed is compared with the reach random number. Ri to determine whether or not to display the reach. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 152B), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to a reach determination table (see FIG. 152 (B)), which will be described later, and is set to the same random number as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to the same random number as the reach determination value that is set in a normal reach determination table (see FIG. 152B) described later and is compared with the reach random number. . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately determined whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the big hit is not achieved. The determination information can be classified into either “out of” which does not display reach (executes reach effect) or “reach 1 to 4” which displays reach (execute reach effect).

  Note that the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether the reach is displayed (reach effect is executed) in any of the game states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is determined whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in any game state at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Can be identified.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148A, when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed and a variable random number are displayed. The mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparing. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating the execution of the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating execution of the reach, and a reach variation pattern table (not shown) described later ) Is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level is specified. A determination value (223-235) indicating that a non-super reach effect is executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. ) Is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating that a super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation level other than a specific super-reach effect is performed, and the jackpot expectation degree A determination value (236-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high value is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with a variable random number. Among the values, the same random number as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1” for executing the normal reach effect as the advance determination information, the jackpot expectation degree “Reach 2” for low super-reach production, “Reach 3” for high-reach super-reach production (other than specific super-reach production), High-reach super-reach production (specific super reach production) ) Can be classified into any one of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the advance determination information can be classified into any one of “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

  As described above, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148A and the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), reach random numbers As a result of the comparison with the random random number), whether or not the big hit or the small hit, whether the big hit, the type of the big hit, if not the big hit or small hit, the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 As shown in FIG. 148 (B), the pre-determined information is “out”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”. ", Reach 1" to "reach 4".

  Then, in the production prior determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified prior determination information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a big hit or a small hit) A reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or a mode type of the game effect to be executed), and a type of the special random number acquired (either the first special random number or the second special random number) And a pre-determination command corresponding to the number of holdings (the value of the holding number counter) stored in correspondence with the acquired special random number. For example, in the production pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the number of first special symbols held The first special symbol predetermination command corresponding to (the value of the first special reservation number counter) is set (step S62). Then, by sending a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the start opening (first start opening 2002, second start start) where the start winning is generated. Either one of the mouths 2004), in addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the starting opening, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning a prize is a big hit or a small hit, In the case of being a big hit type, in the case of not being a big hit or a small hit, advance determination information such as a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or an aspect type of a game effect to be executed, The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU stores a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol and a second determination information related to the variable display of the second special symbol. And a reserved storage area. Each of the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of holds, and the peripheral control MPU receives the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command as the first. The data is stored in order from the (first) storage area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And a variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) (the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the first special symbol, the second special symbol of the second special symbol) When the second variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display is received, the first storage area (the first storage in the first reserved storage area if the first variation pattern command is received) according to the received variation pattern command. If the area, the second variation pattern command has been received, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the second reserved storage area) is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area ( If a variable pattern command has been received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the first reserved memory area, and if a second variable pattern command has been received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the second reserved memory area). The prior determination information is moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (the prior determination information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). In addition, whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be specified by the variation pattern command (whether it is the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command) ), And if it is specified to start the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the prior determination information stored in the first reserved storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified that the variation display of the second special symbol is started based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the prior determination information stored in the second reserved storage area is shifted. Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information Become so.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect predetermination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group A high probability random number determining means having a ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be discriminated as to the outlier determination value set higher than a ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and random number acquisition Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified into either the above-mentioned loss determination value or the above jackpot determination value, and this is not executed. A value that belongs to the high probability random number group in which the winning random numbers used for the determination are mixed with the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value while maintaining the state of It is provided with pseudo-probability advance determination means that makes it possible to execute an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination process that is put on hold by determining whether or not there is The above-described pseudo-probability advance determination means may determine in advance the degree of expectation related to the big win.

  In this way, by including a high probability random number determining means in which the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value are mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the above, regarding the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the winning of the jackpot according to the mixture ratio of the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The preceding determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the decision process based on the random number value (a value belonging to the low-probability random number group that is paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the pre-determined special hit determination value is expected, It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected degree of jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will come to be.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).
5). The first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display so that the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped is displayed. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 143).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol variable display start is in a suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display start of the first special symbol is on hold, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first control symbol stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in the first storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display start is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 152 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 152 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 152 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability non-short-time state, a high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the pre-determination table, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the thirteen types of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the winning is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3924 types of first special random numbers are out of place. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 3937 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 90 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability are the same as the prior determination table. Match the big hit determination value, match the small hit determination value indicating that 19 types of first special random numbers have been won for the small hit, and 3838 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 90 types of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability are the same as the above-described prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3857 types of second special random numbers are out of place.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set and the process is ended (step S118). As a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, When it is determined that that compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 152 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 152 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the gaming state is probable (high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability short state)). Time reach determination table, time reach reach determination table used when the game state is short time (low probability short time state), and when the game state is normal (normal state: low probability non-short time state) And a normal reach determination table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached and 238 types of reach random numbers are not reached, as in the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, similarly to the above-described determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach and the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) than in the probability change (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, as in the above-described pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change and short-time operation are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach determination values coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the time of probability change (high probability state) and in the short time (low probability short time state).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that becomes a reach is set, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 152 (C). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the above-described prior determination table, for each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, specific 3 5R probability variation big hit, specific Design random number (first design) for 6R probability big hit of 4, 5R probability big hit of specific 5, 8R probability big hit of specific 6, 10R probability big hit of specific 7, 2R normal big hit of non-specific 1 and 8R normal big hit of non-specific 2 Random numbers, second symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number, the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. A 2R big hit game in which a game ball is difficult to enter by executing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time, and a probability improvement control is executed from the end of the 2R big hit game until the next big hit If the gaming state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time short-time state, low probability short-time state), a specific 1 2R that executes time-shortening control until the next big hit Probable big hit 1. By controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, a 4R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 4R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 2. 2R 4R probability variation jackpot that executes both By controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, a 5R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 5R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 3. Specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot that executes both of By controlling the second big prize opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, a 6R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 6R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 4. Specific 4 6R probability variation jackpot that executes both By controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, a 7R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 7R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 5. Specific 5 7R probability variation jackpot that executes both If it is the first special lottery result, the first grand prize winning hole 2005 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute an 8R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, the next big hit is made. If the short-time control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state), the short-time control is performed until the next big hit, and the result of the second special lottery For example, by controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, an 8R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 6. Specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot that executes both By controlling the second big prize opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, a 10R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 10R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 7. Specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot that executes both of By controlling the second big winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time, a 16R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 16R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. Specific 8-1 16R probability variation jackpot that executes both
9. A 16R jackpot game in which a game ball can enter while executing a short opening control of the second big prize opening 2006 is executed, and after the 16R jackpot game is finished, the probability improvement control and the time-shortening control are performed until the next jackpot is reached. 2 to 16R probability variation jackpot of specific 8-2 that executes both
10. After the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter by executing the opening control of the second big prize opening 2006 for a long time, the game ball can enter while the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. Specific 8-3 16R probable big hit that executes both probability improvement control and short time control from the end of the 16R big hit game until the next big hit 3
11. A 2R big hit game in which the game ball is difficult to enter by executing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time, and the probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit is reached after the 2R big hit game is finished. If the short-time control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state), the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will be displayed a predetermined number of times after the 2R jackpot game ends. (One of 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, and 72 times) Non-specific 1 2R normal big hit that executes time-saving control until it is executed 12. An 8R jackpot game in which a game ball can enter by executing the opening control of the first big prize opening 2005 for a long time is executed, and the probability improvement control is not executed until the next jackpot is reached after the 8R jackpot game is finished. If the time control is executed at the time of winning (high probability short time state, low probability short time state), the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) will be displayed 72 times after the 8R jackpot game ends. It is determined as any one of twelve types of big hits of non-specific 2 8R normal big hits that execute the short-time control until it is executed.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment value is set to be different from the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of jackpot and the determination ratio are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol includes a specific 1 2R probability variation per unit, a specific 6 8R probability variation per unit, a specific 7 10R probability variation per unit, a non- While the decision value distribution is set for the special 2R big jackpot, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol has the 2R probability variation big for the specific 1, the 4R probability big hit for the specific 2, the specific 3 5R probability variation per unit, 4 specified 6R probability variation per unit, 5 specified 7R probability variation per unit, 8 specified 8R probability variation per unit, 1 specified 8-1 16R probability variation per unit, 2 per specified 8-2 16R probability variation per unit, 2 specified 8− The distribution of the judgment value is set to 3 for 16R probability variation big hit 3 and non-specific 1 2R normal big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a jackpot game that controls the opening / closing of the first big prize opening 2005 or the jackpot game that controls the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 2006, in the jackpot game, the upper part of the center bonus 2500 is A so-called right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is shot to the right of the front view rather than the center in the left-right direction. Further, in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, no obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. When the second big prize opening 2006 is opened due to the structure of the game board 5, when the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the second big prize opening 2006 aimed, The big prize opening 2006 is always won. For this reason, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006, the game ball that is struck into the right hit game area 2540 is not wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1111 (2543c)). , You can digest the big hit game in a short time.

  On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position between the right-handed game area 2540 and the first grand prize winning opening 2005, the game ball has its obstacle. By making contact with the nail, various movements are imparted to the game ball and flow down. Therefore, in the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the first grand prize opening 2005, even if a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first big prize opening 2005, the first big prize opening 2005 The game balls that are not necessarily won and are not won in the first big prize opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from an out mouth 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a. Thus, in this embodiment, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006, the game ball is more efficient than the first big prize opening 2005 in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005. The second big prize opening 2006 is won, and the big hit game can be digested in a short time.

  Further, in this example, in the first round of opening / closing control of the first big prize opening 2005, the condition for changing the first big prize opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state, and in the opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 2006. The conditions for changing the second grand prize winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are changed to the closed state after 29 seconds have passed since being controlled to the open state. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the game is changed to a closed state. And in the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the first grand prize opening 2005, the first big prize opening 2005 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have won the first big prize opening 2005, In the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close, the second big prize opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that ten game balls have won the second big prize opening 2006. In this way, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005, only a maximum of seven game balls can be made to win the first big prize opening 2005, so that seven winning balls per round (this On the other hand, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006, a maximum of ten game balls are won in the second big prize opening 2006 and 10 pieces per round are obtained. A winning ball (150 balls in this example) for winning can be obtained, and more winning balls can be obtained in the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006 than the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 Can be expected.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 2R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined. If the symbol is determined to be a specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special symbol is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol. Decide on a jackpot symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hitting flag is not set as the aspect of the first special symbol (step S126).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the processing of step S127, these lottery results (indicating either the type of big hit, the small hit, the reach out of the reach, or the outage (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the above-mentioned control method may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, the process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU receives a specific 10R probability change big hit from among the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped. If specified, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (the combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols all become the first specific odd symbol (for example, “7”)) is identified, and the specific 8-1 16R probability variation jackpot 1 is identified. In such a case, one symbol of 16R probability variation is determined as one symbol (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols all become the first specific odd symbol (for example, “7”)), and the passage of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command At that time (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when all the combinations of the first specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped, the 10R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol or the specific 8- 1 16R probability variation big hit 1 and the number of rounds is the largest among the big wins resulting from the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game to the second big prize opening 2006 It is possible to determine that the acquisition of the 10R big hit game with easy ball winning is confirmed. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 16R probability variation big hit 2 of the specific 8-2 as the mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped, the 16R probability variation big hit two symbols At the time when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the combination is determined so that all the left, middle and right decorative symbols become the second specific odd symbol (for example, “5”). Display control of the determined stop symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. As described above, when the combination of all the second specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, it is 2 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to the specific 8-2 16R probability variation big hit. It is possible to determine that the expected value of the number of winning balls is the highest (highly likely to win the most winning balls) among the big wins resulting from the second special lottery result. .

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 2R probability variation big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped. Is determined to be a 4R probability variable big hit symbol (a combination consisting of the same odd number of odd numbers “1”, “5”, and “9”), and a specific 3R 5R probability variable big hit is specified. Is determined to be a 5R probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of odd numbers of “1”, “5”, and “9” odd symbols. Common to 4R probability variation big hit symbol) and 4R specific variation of 6R probability variation When the big hit is specified, the 6R probability variable big hit symbol (the combination consisting of the same odd number of “1”, “5” and “9” odd symbols. Same as 4R positive variable big hit symbol and 5R positive variable big hit symbol) Decision When the 7R probability variable big hit of the specific 5 is specified among the big hits, the 7R probability variable big hit symbol (the combination of the odd numbers of the odd symbols “1”, “5”, “9”. 4R probability variable big hit symbol) 5R probability variation big hit symbol and 6R probability variation big hit symbol), and when the specified 6R 8R probability variation big hit is specified based on the second special lottery result among the big wins, the 8R probability variable big hit symbol ("1", "5", "9" combination consisting of the same odd number of symbols. 4R probability variation big hit symbol, 5R probability variation big hit symbol, common with 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and 7R probability variable big hit symbol) If 3 of 16R probability variation jackpots of specific 8-3 are identified, a combination of 3 odd symbols of 16R probability variation jackpots (the combination of odd numbers of “1”, “5”, “9” odd symbols. 4R probability variation jackpots) Design 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, 7R probability variation jackpot symbol, and 8R probability variation jackpot symbol) are determined when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect). The display of the stopped symbols is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of odd symbols “1”, “5”, and “9” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. From the design, any of the following: 4 specific 2R accuracy variation, 3 specific 5R accuracy variation, 4 specific 6R accuracy variation, 7 specific 5R accuracy variation, 6 specific 8R accuracy variation per size, 8-3 specific 16R accuracy variation per 3 Although it cannot be discriminated, it can be discriminated that it is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game for controlling the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU specifies 6 based on the first special lottery result from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. When the 8R probability variation jackpot is specified, it is determined to be the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of the same even symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” even symbols). Of these, when an unspecified 2 8R normal jackpot is specified, an 8R normal jackpot symbol (a combination of the same even symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” even symbols. 8R probability variation. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the same even symbols among the even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is suspended. It is not possible to discriminate between a specific 6 8R probability variation big hit and a non-specific 2 8R normal big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative design, and a high probability state is reached after the end of the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 It cannot be determined whether or not to control.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 1R 2R probability variation big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped. Is determined to be a 2R probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of symbols (specifically, a combination including all the decorative symbols “3”, “5” and “7”)). However, when a small hit is specified, it is determined as a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols (disjoint) among the outlier symbols). When the variable time has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbol “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit of the specific 1 is selected from the decorative symbol stopped symbol. Even after the end of the 2R big hit game using the first big prize opening 2005 (the 2R big hit game where it is difficult to enter the game ball by opening the first big prize opening 2005 for a short time) In the main liquid crystal display device 1600, since it is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state, it is impossible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end of these big hit games.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, is determined to be out of the reach with the reach if the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command. If the design is determined to be a combination of decorative designs that are not the same (but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and a detachment is specified, it is a detachable design (a combination of decorative designs that is not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach corresponding to the current game state is selected (S1). S146), when none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when a normal deviation occurs (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (No) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). The variation pattern determined in this way includes the special symbol after the variation display of the contents of the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is started. Information indicating the variation time until the variation display of the first special symbol (in this case) is stopped is also included. By receiving the variation pattern command set in step S149, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 starts the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changes in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting the display of variation of the contents of game effects and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on main liquid crystal display device 1600 The change time until the display is stopped is specified. In addition, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display (the first special symbol variation display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the decorative symbol variation display) for the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. To be done.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the variation. Each random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is compared by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number, as in the above-described prior determination table. Is set to determine. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with a determination value (0-163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low expectation degree of jackpot. Match with a determination value (164-222) indicating execution of, and match with a determination value (223-240) indicating that one of the 18 kinds of variable random numbers executes one of the super-reaching effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot As described above, the above random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach production has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production, and when the super reach production is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big hit game is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display is started, a variation counter for counting the variation number of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) after the big hit game is next processed in step S151. It is determined whether or not the counter value is “0”. As described above, in this example, when the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1 2R normal big hit, and when the short-time control is executed at the time of winning, a special symbol (first 8R normal control with time reduction until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, 72 times), and the first special lottery result is non-specific 2 In the case of a big hit, if the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, the time reduction control is executed until the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game. To do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit is terminated in the big hit control process, the number of times (any one of 18, 36, 54, 72) is set in the fluctuation number counter. Then, when the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit is ended, “72” times is set in the variation counter. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the change display of the number set in the change counter is executed after the big hit game. If the counter value is not “0”, that is, if the change display of the number of times set in the change counter is not executed after the big hit game, the change counter is counted down (1 subtraction) (step S152). Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0” (step S153). As a result, if the counter value is “0”, that is, if the change display of the number of times set in the change counter is executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that is set (step S154). .

  When it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the variation counter is “0”, that is, the variation of the number of times already set in the variation counter after the big hit game due to non-specific 1 and non-specific 2 When the display is executed or when it is determined that the variation counter is not “0” in the process of step S153, that is, after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2 is set to the variation counter If the change display of the given number of times has not been executed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that time. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated. In the case of executing the time-saving control from the end of the big hit game due to the big hit of the specific 1 to the specific 8-3 until the next big hit, the variable number counter is set to “0” in the big hit control process. On the other hand, by setting the time reduction flag, the time reduction control is continued until the next big hit.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the variation display of the number of times set in the variation number counter after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2 when the end flag is set. Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset (step S185). ). As a result, after the variation display of the number of times set in the variation counter after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2 is executed, the control of the low probability non-short state (normal state) is executed. .

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, the short time flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S190), this process is terminated. The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of big hit (2R accuracy variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 5R accuracy variation big hit, 6R accuracy variation big hit, 7R accuracy variation big hit, 8R accuracy variation big hit, 10R accuracy variation big hit 16R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit). In step S187, depending on the type of big hit (2R accuracy variation per unit, 4R accuracy variation per unit, 5R accuracy variation per unit, 6R accuracy variation per unit, 8R accuracy variation per unit, 8R accuracy variation per unit, 10R accuracy variation per unit, 16R accuracy variation per unit, 2R normal unit per unit, 8R normal unit per unit) Jackpot start command (2R accurate variable big hit start command, 4R positive variable big hit start command, 5R positive variable big hit start command, 6R positive variable big hit start command, 7R positive variable big hit start command, 8R positive variable big hit start command, 10R positive variable big hit start command, 16R positive variable big hit start command Start command, 2R normal jackpot start command, 8R normal jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started (step S192), The waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S194), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of update (step S190), this process is terminated. The small hitting start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S195, the small hitting start command is set, so that the effect of the small hitting game instructed by the small hitting start command is the main liquid crystal. It is executed by the display device 1600, lamp / LED, speaker 921, and the like.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 157, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 1310 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speaker 921 or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is used as the serial number for the lamp driving board. The game board side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3043 from the I / O port or for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is for the game board decoration drive board. Door side for transmitting from the serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 or the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3 Door side composed of drive data and door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen for transmitting dynamic light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side or displaying on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is liquid crystal. Processing such as transmission to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for the control unit or output of a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) used in a lottery process related to a specific notice effect described later) A process of updating the value of a random number counter or the like that generates a determination random number is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the notice determination process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). As shown in FIG. 159, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), the hold corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the received pre-determination command is received. Prior determination information is stored in the storage area (step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the holding storage area for storing the predetermination information indicated by the predetermination command, the first holding storage area for storing the predetermination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second And a second reserved storage area in which pre-determined information related to the special symbol variation display is stored. Further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area correspond to 4 to 4 corresponding to the number of holds, respectively. It has one storage area. Peripheral control MPU, if the received pre-determination command indicates pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol, the pre-determination is made in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the pre-determination command in the first hold storage area Information is stored, and if the received prior determination command indicates the prior determination information regarding the variation display of the second special symbol, the advance determination is performed in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the prior determination command in the second reserved storage area. Stores judgment information.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a specific notice effect described later is being executed (step S303), and whether or not the number of holds indicated by the received prior determination command is “4” (step S304). If the specific notice effect is not being executed and the number of holds indicated by the advance determination command is “4”, the reserved storage area (the first special symbol variable display) that stores the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination command. The number of holds “1” to “3” in the first reserved storage area if it indicates prior determination information, and the second reserved storage area if it indicates prior determination information related to the variable display of the second special symbol. In the storage area corresponding to, reach determination information other than loss, specifically, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12 set as prior determination information in the determination table shown in FIG. Either pre-determined information-reach 4 it is determined whether or not stored (step S305).

If pre-determination information other than loss is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds “1” to “3” among the hold storage areas storing the pre-determination information indicated by the pre-determination command received in step S305 (YES in step S305), the process ends without executing the process of step S306 to step S309, that is, the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect. In this embodiment, a series of stories as a specific notice effect is made a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) a plurality of times (in this example, three times, but may be two times, or two times of variable display) It is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to a variable display of a specific notice effect that is executed separately and a specific notice effect that is executed in three divided displays. This is divided into a plurality of predetermined (3 in this example) variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed (the story that is completed in three episodes is displayed one episode at a time for one variable display of the decorative symbol. To run). In addition, in the case of a plurality of fluctuating display of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect, instead of the decorative symbol fluctuating display, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the end portion (for example, the upper left end portion) of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The stop symbol of the decorative design is displayed after displaying a part of the series of stories (one time of a series of stories executed in three times). In this case, if a variation display that becomes a big hit, a small hit, or reach is included in a plurality of variation displays that execute a specific notice effect, a big hit game or a small hit game is started in the middle of a series of stories. It is impossible to execute all the series of stories. In addition, it is not executed when a big or small hit is made, but if it is executed when a reach is reached, the player is informed that if a reach is made during the execution of a specific notice effect, the player will always lose. Even if they are realized and reach production is executed, they cannot have any expectation for jackpot. Therefore, in this example, when a start winning occurs, the number of times that a variable display that is not accompanied by reach is determined as a variable display for which a start condition for variable display has not yet been established other than the generated start winning is determined in advance ( In this example, the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect is executed only when it is stored three times.

  Of the reserved storage areas storing the advance determination information indicated by the advance determination command received in step S305, the advance determination information other than the loss is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds “1” to “3”. (NO in step S305), a notice determination table corresponding to the advance decision information is selected (step S306), and a notice determination in a numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) determined in advance in the random number update process (step S606) described above. One notice determination random number is acquired from a random number counter that updates the random number, and the obtained notice determination random number is compared with the notice determination table selected in step S306 (step S307).

  In the present embodiment, the notice determination table to be compared with the notice determination random number is provided for each of the above-described prior determination information (disconnected, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12, reach 1 to reach 4). Within the pre-judgment information with the same type of small hits (in this example, the big hits 1-4 are the same type of big hits (specific 7, 8), and the big hits 5-8 are the same type of big hits (specific 2-6, unspecified) 2), and the jackpot 9 to 12 is the same type of jackpot (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hit)), the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance to be executed (in this example, the level of the jackpot expectation is The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect increases in proportion to (specific strong SP reach ≧ strong SP reach other than specific> weak SP reach> normal reach).

  Also, in the notice determination table that is selected when the prior determination information is not a win and indicates that the reach is reached, the big hit expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the high hit expectation degree is specified) The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect increases in proportion to (strong SP reach of other than ≧ strong SP reach other than specific> weak SP reach> normal reach). On the other hand, in the advance notice determination table that is selected when the prior decision information indicates that it is out of place, a decision value is assigned so that the specific advance notice effect is determined regardless of the obtained advance notice determination random number.

  In this way, the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed (in this example, if it is determined that the specific notice effect is executed, three times before the start of the variable display based on the hold that caused the determination) The specific notice effect is executed over the variable display, and the variable display that causes the specific notice effect to be executed for the fourth time is executed). When the specific notice effect is executed, the expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be increased. In addition, even if the prior determination information is not out of sync, the proportion of execution of the specific notice effect increases in proportion to the expectation level of the jackpot of the reach effect that is executed. This makes it possible to pay attention to the type of reach effect and to increase the expectation for occurrence of a big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed.

  Further, when compared with each group of prior determination information grouped for each hit type, the degree of advantage for the player (in this example, the degree of advantage for the player is a big hit 1 that is summarized in the big hit of specific 7, 8 ~ 4> big hits collected from specific 2-6, non-specific 2 big hits 5-8> specific 1, non-specific 1 big hits, big hits collected from small hits 9-12 in order) The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is high. And since the reach 1-4 gathered by the reach that becomes outlier is less advantageous to the player than the pre-determined judgment information, the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is lower than the big hit 1-12. A judgment value is set for. As a result, a big hit that is more advantageous to the player when the specific notice effect is executed, specifically, when the specific notice effect is executed with respect to the change display of the first special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 10R probability change big hit is expected. When the specific notice effect is executed with respect to the second special symbol, the expectation for occurrence of the 16R probability variation big hit can be increased.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment completes the series of stories by executing the specific notice effect over a predetermined number of times (three times in this example) of the decorative symbols. It is something to be made. However, in determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, the specific notice effect is executed over a variable display that is less than a predetermined number of times (in this example, once or twice) as the number of notices. A decision (so-called “gase notice”) can also be made. If it is decided to execute this gasse advance notice, a series of stories will not be completed, and the specific notice effect will end, so there will be expectation for the big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed I can't. Therefore, when the specific notice effect is executed, the player plays the game while hoping that it will be executed over a predetermined number of variable displays. Note that when the specific notice effect is executed, the specific notice effect may be resumed when the next decorative symbol variation display is started again after being temporarily ended in the middle of a series of stories. As a result, it is possible to expect the specific notice effect to be resumed even when the gasse notice is executed.

  As a result of comparing the notice determination random number and the selected notice determination table, the effect control MPU executes the specific notice effect or executes the notice effect when it is determined that the specific notice effect is executed (YES in step S308). A notice flag indicating this is set, and the determined number of specific notice effects is set in the notice counter, and the process ends (step S309). The notice flag is referred to in the above-described determination of whether or not to execute the specific notice effect in step S303 and the variable effect start process described later. If the notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU performs the specific notice effect. If it is determined that a notice flag is set in a fluctuating effect start process described later, process data for executing a specific notice effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the fluctuating pattern command received from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the specific notice effect is executed. If the number of executions of the specific notice effect is decided once, “1” is set in the notice counter, and if decided twice, “2” is set in the notice counter and decided three times. If so, set “3” in the notice counter. As a result, the specific notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number of executions of the specific notice effect set in the notice counter in step S309.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be.

1. Fluctuation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed in the command analysis process (the first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the second variation that indicates the variation pattern of the second special symbol) After performing processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the pattern command), the variation effect start processing for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during variation effect (step S711) )
2. The time elapsed since the start of the control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, LED, speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, LED, speaker 921, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time. Processing during changing effect (step S712) in which the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change ending process in response to elapse of the changing time corresponding to the pattern.
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a symbol stop command for instructing to stop the special symbol variation display is performed. If it is a big hit, it is changed to a value according to the big hit effect process, and if it is a small hit, the variable effect end process is changed to a value according to the small hit effect process (step S713).
4). Based on the reception of the jackpot start command for instructing the start of the jackpot game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game, and the effect process flag is set when the jackpot game is ended. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to be changed to a value corresponding to the variation effect start processing
5). The main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the small hit game based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game. Small hit effect process for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the change effect start process (step S715)

  The main liquid crystal display is synchronized with the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) by the above processing. The apparatus 1600 executes the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-described fluctuating effect start process (step S711). When the effect control process flag indicates that the change effect start process is performed, as shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 first determines the change pattern command (first change It is determined whether or not a pattern command or a second variation pattern command has been received (step S801). If a variation pattern command has been received, a decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

  Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU has received the first variation pattern command, the peripheral control MPU is transmitted from the main control MPU set in step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and mounted on the main control board 1310. Based on the determination result notification command, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol, the 8R probability variation big hit symbol, the 10R probability variation big hit symbol, the 8R normal big hit symbol, the 8R normal big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, the off symbol, and the second variation pattern command are received. If so, based on the determination result notification command sent from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 and set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), the above-mentioned 2R probability variation big hit symbol, 4R probability variation Big hit symbol, 5R probability variation big hit symbol, 6R probability variation big hit symbol, 7R probability variation big hit symbol, 8R probability variation big hit symbol, 16R probability variation Per symbol, 2R usually big hit symbol is determined to either the failure symbol.

  When the received fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command, second fluctuation pattern command) results in a fluctuation display, the received fluctuation pattern command is reached (in this case, the left decorative pattern and the right decoration pattern When the decorative symbol is displayed with the same symbol stopped and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol Only the middle decorative symbol is determined as a combination of symbols different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol (reach off symbol).

  When the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is determined, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed by setting the notice determination process described above is set (step S803). If the advance flag is not set, process data corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected (step S806), and display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

  On the other hand, if the notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times of execution this time among the multiple display (three times in this example) of executing the specific notice effect. The process data corresponding to the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected from a plurality of types of process data corresponding to (Step S804), and the value of the notice counter is decremented by 1 (Step S805) and selected. Display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The above-mentioned notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display times for executing the specific notice effect, and is set according to the determined execution number of the specific notice effect when it is determined to execute the specific notice effect. It is like that.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least when the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) starts a variable display that does not involve reach, in other words, at least the special lottery result ( If the start condition of the variable display that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are not accompanied by reach is satisfied, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied is still satisfied In accordance with the number of variable displays that are not displayed, that is, the number of holds, hold shortening control is executed to shorten the fluctuation time of the change display more than usual. Specifically, in this example, as a deviation fluctuation pattern that is a deviation without reach, a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time “13 seconds”, a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time “8 seconds”, and a fluctuation time “4 seconds”. The main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 holds the first special symbol when the start condition of the variable display in which the first special lottery result is out of reach without reaching is satisfied. If the number is "1" or "2", the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) determines that the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of "13 seconds", and the first special symbol hold number is "3". If there is, the shift variation pattern with a variation time of “8 seconds” is determined, and if the number of first special symbols held is “4”, the shift variation pattern with a variation time of “4 seconds” is determined. In addition, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 has the second special symbol holding number “1” or “when the start condition of the variable display in which the second special lottery result is out of reach without reach is satisfied. If it is “2”, it is determined as a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “13 seconds” in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (not shown). If the number of second special symbols held is “3”, the fluctuation time is “8 seconds”. If the second special symbol hold number is “4”, the variation pattern is determined to be the deviation variation pattern.

  In addition, as described above, a plurality of fluctuating display of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect is replaced with the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol is reduced to reduce the end portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the upper left end portion). ) Displaying a part of a series of stories (one part of a series of stories that are executed in three steps) and then displaying a decorative design stop symbol Therefore, when the period of the story to be displayed in one variation display among a plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol that executes a series of stories as a specific notice effect is fixed, the above-described hold shortening control is executed and 1 The fluctuation time becomes shorter than the period of the story displayed in the single fluctuation display, and the entire story cannot be displayed, or the period of the story displayed in the single fluctuation display is short. Even if the hold shortening control is executed, the decoration is made after displaying the story to be displayed in one variation display by preventing the variation time from being shorter than the period of the story to be displayed in one variation display. There is a problem that a useless period occurs before the stop symbol of the symbol is displayed and the player is bored.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, each variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols that execute a series of stories as a specific notice effect is displayed with one variation display so as to correspond to the above-described hold shortening control. It has multiple types of process data with different story periods. That is, among a plurality of (three in this example) decorative symbol variation displays that execute a series of stories as a specific announcement effect, the variation time is “8 seconds” as a story that is displayed in the first variation display. The process data corresponding to "4 seconds" and the process data corresponding to "4 seconds", the number of notices corresponding to the process data corresponding to the variation time "13 seconds" and "8 seconds" as the story displayed in the second variation display Process data corresponding to “4 seconds”, the process data corresponding to “8 seconds” and the process data corresponding to the variation time “13 seconds” as a story to be displayed in the third variable display. Data and process data corresponding to “4 seconds”. In step S804, process data corresponding to the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of advance notices. In the above-described example, when the first variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect is started, the number of suspension is always three or more, and “4 seconds” Alternatively, although only the process data corresponding to the variation time of “8 seconds” is shown, “4 seconds” and “8 seconds” are displayed as the first variation display among the plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect. Not only the process data corresponding to one variation time, but also process data corresponding to a variation time of “13 seconds” may be provided. That is, when the specific notice effect can be executed even when the number of holds is 3 or less in step S304 of the notice determination process, the first change display among the plurality of change displays of the specific notice effect. In this case, the number of holdings is two or less, and the above-described holding shortening control is not executed, and the fluctuation time of “13 seconds” is determined. It is possible to select the process data corresponding to, and execute the first variation display among the plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect, or the variation display start condition other than the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied. When the variation shortening control is executed only when the number of variation displays that are not established is “4”, when the first variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect is started No more than 3 holds on the above In some cases, the process time corresponding to the fluctuation time of “13 seconds” is selected and a specific notice effect is generated multiple times. Of these fluctuation displays, the first fluctuation display may be executed.

  In addition, multiple types of process data corresponding to the same number of notices are configured to display the same story. The variation time and the production period are matched with each other in detail. In addition, not only when process data corresponding to the same variation time is selected by the number of consecutive notices, but also when process data corresponding to different variation times is selected, each story is smoothly connected to the game. Each process data is configured so as not to give the person a sense of incongruity. Thereby, a series of stories can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU discards the advance determination information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area that stores the advance determination information in step S302 of the advance notice determination process in response to the received variation pattern command. The pre-determined information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area and stored in the reserved storage area. Prior determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first variation pattern command is received, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is discarded. If the stored prior determination information is moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area and the second variation pattern command is received, the first storage area in the second reserved storage area The prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is discarded and the prior determination information stored in the N-1 (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved. Let

  Then, the peripheral control MPU ends this process when the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the changing effect processing (step S712) (step S813).

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-described variation effect end process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the change effect end process is performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs the change effect start process (step S711). The stop symbol determined in step S802 is fixedly displayed (a state where all the left, middle and right decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed) (step S851).

  Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 has received a jackpot start command notifying that the jackpot game is started from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S852). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the big hit effect process (step S714) (step S853), this process ends.

  Also, if a small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 to notify the start of the small hit game (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit effect process (step S715). As described above, when the above-described effect control process flag is updated (step S855), this process ends.

  Further, when neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), if the above-mentioned notice flag is set (step S856) Whether or not the notice counter is “0”, that is, whether or not all the variable displays (three times in this example) that execute the specific notice effect have been executed (the remaining number of times of the specific notice effect is “0”). (Step S857), and resetting the notice flag if all of the variable display of a plurality of times (three times in this example) for executing the specific notice effect is executed (step S858), When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variable effect start process (step S711) (step S859), this process ends.

[10. Summary of specific notice effects]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device is adapted to display a series of stories as a specific notice effect in accordance with a plurality of (three in this example) variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The decoration pattern is executed in multiple steps (in this example, three times) displayed in 1600. However, the period for executing a series of stories as a specific notice effect is not constant, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-described hold shortening control. In the present embodiment, even when the period for executing a series of stories as a specific notice effect is changed (shortened) by the hold shortening control, these series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It is like that. That is, the same story can be displayed in a plurality of variable times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the above-described hold shortening control at the same number of notices in a series of stories executed as a specific notice effect. Process data is configured, and the variation time and the production time are matched by simplifying the production contents according to the period of the fluctuation time or by making it more detailed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163, in the case where the number of notices is the third (in this example, the last change display of the specific notice effect), the number of holdings whose change time is 4 seconds is one or two. When the explanation that “geniuses attack such A” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, when the number of holdings whose variation time is 13 seconds is four, “the talent will be blossomed” The explanation that “who is attacked by A” will be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, and the longer variation time will give a more detailed explanation. Moreover, in addition to the description by such a character, when the number of holdings whose variation time is 13 seconds is four compared with the case where the number of holdings whose variation time is 4 seconds is 1 or 2, more Video is displayed. In this way, the longer the variation time, the more detailed the contents of the production, so that the player can obtain a lot of information. Also, the longer the variation time, the more detailed the content of the production has been explained, but depending on the production that is added with this fluctuation time becoming longer, suggestion of the degree of expectation for the hold that caused the execution of the specific notice effect May be performed. For example, by preparing a plurality of (for example, white, blue, red) character colors of “flowering talent” in FIG. 163, the specific notice effect itself can be viewed with expectation.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment executes the variable display of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first starting port 2002, the change display of the second special symbol starts when the starting winning at the second starting port 2004 occurs. The period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time cannot be matched among the plurality of variation displays of decorative symbols executed as the specific notice effect, or as the specific notice effect. There is a possibility that the variation display that causes the specific notice effect to be performed as the variation display immediately after displaying a series of stories over a plurality of variation displays may not be performed. Therefore, in this example, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start port 2002, it is before executing the variable display according to the number of executions of the specific notice effect. In addition, when a start winning at the second start port 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. Specifically, although not shown, when the notice flag is set in step S803 of the above-described variation effect start process, the notice flag is set due to the start winning at the first start port 2002. The variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 when it is set due to the start winning to the first start port 2002 is related to the second special symbol ( If the second variation pattern command), the advance notice flag is reset and the process proceeds to step S806, where the specific notice effect is ended before the change display corresponding to the number of executions determined is executed. On the other hand, when the specific notice effect based on the occurrence of the start prize at the second start opening 2004 is executed in step S803, the specific notice based on the occurrence of the start prize at the first start opening 2002 in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, if the variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 is related to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific notice effect is continued. Thus, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In this way, the player feels uncomfortable by ensuring that the period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time are consistent with each other among the plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol executed as the specific notice effect. In addition to suppressing this, it is possible to execute the variable display that causes the specific notice effect to be executed as a variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories as a specific notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. Yes. In the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start opening 2004, the specific advance notice effect is performed only in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start opening 2002 without executing the specific advance notice effect. May be executed. That is, if the advance determination command received in step S301 of the advance notice determination process is based on the occurrence of a start winning at the second start opening 2004, the process from step S302 to step S309, that is, the specific advance notice effect is executed. The specific notice effect may not be executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start port 2004 by ending the process without executing the lottery process.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start port 2002, it is before the variable display corresponding to the number of executions of the specific notice effect is executed. However, when the start winning at the second starting port 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the starting winning at the second starting port 2004, for example. The specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the specific notice effect is resumed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variation display based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is ended. Also good. Further, in this case, the fact that the specific notice effect is interrupted ("notice of notice effect" is interrupted) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the start winning prize at the second start port 2004. You may make it do. In addition, even when the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when starting the display of the decorative symbols based on the start winning at the second starting port 2004, the second special based on the starting winning at the second starting port 2004 is performed. If the lottery result is a big hit, the specific notice effect may be ended without resuming.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, a story that is completed in three episodes is executed as one specific announcement effect so that one story is displayed for each variation display of decorative symbols executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Since all three episodes of the specific notice effect are executed, it is possible to expect a variation display to be executed next, so that the player pays attention to what story is being executed. . For this reason, in this example, when a specific notice effect is being executed, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 displays the number of stories being executed (for example, “Third Story”). .

  In the above-described embodiment, a series of stories is executed as a specific notice effect divided into a plurality of variation displays of decorative symbols executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to a plurality of variations of special symbols. However, a series of stories can also be used as a specific notice effect even in the decorative display multiple times (so-called quasi-continuous fluctuation) displayed in the decorative pattern executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the single fluctuation display of the special symbol. You may make it possible to divide and execute the decorative design in multiple times.

  Further, in this example, the specific notice effect can be executed only when the number of holds is “4” which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in step S304 of the notice determination process described above. However, even if the number of holds is not the maximum value, the specific notice effect may be executed, and in this case, the number of executions of the specific notice effect is determined to be a number not exceeding the hold number. May be. For example, when a start winning to the first starting port 2002 occurs in the state where the number of reserved first special symbols is “2”, the change display based on the starting winning that occurred this time is excluded as the number of executions of the specific notice effect “2”. The number of times may not be exceeded. In addition, the probability that it is determined that the specific notice effect is to be executed according to the number of holds may be changed. For example, if the hold number is the maximum value, the specific notice effect is executed more than when the hold number is not the maximum value. Then, the probability of determination may be increased.

  Further, as described above, a series of stories as the specific notice effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuation displays that are not accompanied by reach. The fluctuation display without the reach is usually the most frequently executed fluctuation pattern, and the player can hardly expect the big hit. In this example, by executing the specific notice effect over the variable display without reach, even if the variable display that the player can hardly expect from the big hit is executed, the expectation for the big hit is achieved. Can be increased.

  On the other hand, when a specific notice effect is executed, the fluctuation display in which a series of stories is being executed is always out of place, and in the fluctuation display immediately after the completion of this series of stories (the fluctuation display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect) The possibility of a big hit increases. In other words, the player can guess that the result of the variable display will be out of the three variable displays that execute a series of stories as a specific notice effect, and the variable display (specific On the other hand, the occurrence of a big hit can be expected for the fluctuation display executed immediately after the end of the notice effect, while the excessive expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be suppressed in the three fluctuation displays for executing a series of stories.

  Further, in the variable display immediately after the series of stories as the specific notice effect is executed (the variable display that causes the specific notice effect to be executed), the effects related to the series of stories executed as the specific notice effect are executed. You may do it. Due to this, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the specific notice effect to be executed in conjunction with the multiple display that executes the specific notice effect, and cause the specific notice effect to be executed from the start of execution of a series of stories. It is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the big hit by executing the related effects over a long period of time until the change display becomes.

  The story to be executed in one variation display among a plurality of variation displays of decorative symbols for executing a series of stories as the specific notice effect is changed depending on the number of holds when the variation display is started. Therefore, it is possible to give a new gameability such as adjusting the driving of a game ball aiming at a change in the number of holds in order to see all different stories for each number of holds. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to win a big win based on the occurrence of a start winning at the first starting port 2002 or a starting winning at the second starting port 2004. Yes, the greater the number of start winnings at the first starting port 2002 and the starting winnings at the second starting port 2004, the more advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a game is executed, when the specific notice effect is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as the specific notice effect for the player whose degree of advantage is reduced by stopping the game ball driving. In order to give the privilege to do, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's feeling due to the decrease in the degree of advantage and gradually increase the expectation for the big hit.

[11. Yarenso chance production]
Next, the eight consecutive villa chance effects executed during the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R When the probability variation big hit is 3 ", the combination of the odd symbols of the odd symbols of" 1 "," 5 ", and" 9 "is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols. From the stop symbol, any of the following: 4 out of 2R accuracy variation per specific, 3R per 5R accuracy variation per specific, 6R accuracy variation per 4 specified, 7R accuracy variation per specified 5, 8R accuracy variation per specified 6 or 16R accuracy per 3 per specific 8-3 It is not possible to determine whether or not you have won.

  The results of the second special lottery were “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “16R probability variation big hit”. When the jackpot game based on the game is started, an eight consecutive villa chance effect for notifying the player of which jackpot has been won through the mahjong game is executed as an effect during the jackpot game. Yarenso is a mahjong game where one person finishes eight times in succession. ) And is very difficult. For this reason, the player can guess that a special state will occur when the main character plays eight consecutive villas in the mahjong game.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (A), the above-mentioned second special lottery results are “4R probability variation big hit”, “5R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, “7R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, as shown in FIG. After all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as “5” as the big winning symbols of the decorative symbols that can be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in common when “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the big hit game is started Is notified (FIG. 164 (B)), and the fact that the eight consecutive villa chance effect is executed is notified (FIG. 164 (C)). In this example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the message “Bonus bonus is achieved by achieving Yarenso !?”, and when the main character is Yarenso, it is full. It can be grasped that a bonus is given. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a big hit game that controls the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or the big hit game that controls the opening / closing of the second big winning prize opening 2006, Since a so-called right-handed game is performed, in which a game ball is shot rightward in front of the center in the left-right direction at the top of 2500, when a big hit game is started, “right-handed →” is displayed at the upper right part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By displaying, the player can rotate the handle lever 504 to adjust the launch strength so that a right-handed game is performed.

  Also, in this example, the eight consecutive villa chance production is started with the main character becoming the parent in the mahjong game, and the main character is completed every round of the big hit game, or a character other than the main character (for example, The result of either sub-character) or whether it becomes a current station without anybody's completion is displayed. Then, when the main character is finished, the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is continued to start the next round, and characters (sub characters) other than the main character are finished. In the case where the player becomes a fluent station without anybody having finished, the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is ended. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the eight consecutive villa chance production while hoping to continue the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time. It should be noted that since a big hit game with four rounds or more is always executed in the big hit that executes the eight consecutive villa chance effect, the main character is always executed until the third round of the big hit game. In this way, until the third round, since the main character always finishes the game and the jackpot game is continued, the appearance frequency of the effect that the main character finishes and the jackpot game continues in the Yarenso chance chance effect. As it grows, it gives a good impression to the player about the Yarenso chance production, and when the Yarenso chance production is executed, the expectation for the continuation of the big hit game can be improved.

  Then, when the eight consecutive villa chance production is started, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character takes the mahjong tile in the mahjong game (FIG. 164 (D)), and then that the main character has picked up the winning tile. By displaying the manner in which the main character is completed, the fact that the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is notified and the big hit game in which the second big prize port 2006 is controlled to be released for a long time is notified. The number of continuations (number of consecutive resorts) is notified (FIG. 164F). In this example, as shown in FIG. 164 (F), as in the mahjong game, the number of turf sticks is notified as “one spot”, and the number of rounds of the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time (ream) Notification). In this example, the number of rounds being executed is displayed on the lower left portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the number of lawn bars corresponding to the number of consecutive games is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114. The number of turf bars displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 3114 is increased every time the big hit game for which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time (every round of the big hit game continues). You can now check the number of reams (number of rounds) of the eight ream chance production.

  In addition, when the big hit game this time is executed based on the second special lottery result of “4R probability variation big hit”, the peripheral control MPU produces the same effects as those in FIGS. 164D to 164F. After the display is executed in each round up to 3 rounds of the jackpot game, when the fourth round of the jackpot game is started, “three spots” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (FIG. 164 (G)), and the main A mode in which the character takes a mahjong tile in the mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 164 (H)). Then, after displaying a mode in which a character (sub character) other than the main character has ended, or no one has ended (in the example of FIG. 164 (I), no one has ended) The mode that has become a popular place is displayed), the total number of main characters gained in the mahjong game executed during the eight-rensou chance production is displayed (FIG. 164 (J)), and the big hit game is terminated ( FIG. 164 (K)).

  On the other hand, when the big hit game of this time is executed based on the second special lottery result of “16R probability variable big hit 3”, the peripheral control MPU is the same as in FIG. 164 (D) to FIG. 164 (F). After performing the effect display in each round up to the seventh round of the jackpot game, when the eighth round of the jackpot game is started, “seven main places” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (FIG. 165 (A)), and again A mode in which the main character takes a mahjong tile in the mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 165 (B)). Then, the main character displays a mode that the main character is relieved by hitting the hit (FIG. 165 (C)), and is executed during the achievement of the eight consecutive villas and during the eight consecutive villa chance production. After displaying the total score of main characters in the mahjong game (FIG. 165 (D)), the bonus game is continued by displaying “bonus bonus!” On the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without ending the jackpot game ( FIG. 165 (E)). In addition, as described above, in the 9th to 16th rounds of the big hit game executed during the full bonus, an opening / closing pattern in which a game ball can be entered while the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time is executed. . In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in order to prevent the player from realizing that the opening / closing control of the big prize opening is performed, the opening / closing of the big prize opening is controlled for a short time and a normal left-handed game is performed. However, in the case of this example, the winning ball can be obtained by allowing the gaming ball to enter while the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. By continuing to display “→”, the player is actively notified that a right-handed game will be performed, and promotes the player to acquire a prize ball.

  As described above, in this example, when the result of the second special lottery is “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball can enter by controlling the second large winning opening 2006 to be opened for a long time is provided. After executing 8 rounds, the opening / closing pattern in which a game ball can enter is executed for 8 rounds while the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. Further, in each round from when the above-mentioned eight consecutive villa chance effects are executed until the main character makes eight consecutive villas, an opening / closing pattern in which a game ball can enter is executed by controlling the second big prize opening 2006 for a long time. The Then, after the main character achieves the eight consecutive villas by performing the eight consecutive villa chance effect, the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball can enter while controlling the second large winning opening 2006 to be opened for a short time as a bonus. Is supposed to run. As a result, if the main character achieves the Yarenso chance production by executing the Yarenso chance production, the bonus bonus is executed after the Yarenso chance production and the 8 rounds executed during the Yarenso chance production. In addition to this, you will be able to earn 8 more rounds. In addition, in the opening and closing pattern in which a game ball can be entered while the second big prize opening 2006 executed with a full bonus is controlled to be opened for a short time, a maximum of two game balls can be given to the second big prize opening in one round. The ball can be entered in 2006. Therefore, after the bonus bonus is executed, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can be entered is executed for 8 rounds by controlling the second big prize opening 2006 for a long time without executing the bonus bonus. Compared to the case where the big hit game is finished, the player can acquire 240 more prize balls. In this way, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game changes according to the production result of the eight-rencho chance production, so when the eight-renso chance production is executed, pay attention to the production result and a bonus bonus Can be expected to win.

  In this way, in the bonus bonus executed when the main character achieves the eight consecutive villas by executing the eight consecutive villa chance effect, the long opening control of the second big prize opening 2006 is not executed, and the short opening control is performed. Only executed. As a result, the player can be given an illusion that a new jackpot other than up to eight rounds of the jackpot game has been awarded, and the game entertainment can be improved when a full bonus is executed.

  In the above example, when the main character achieves the eight consecutive villas by executing the eight consecutive villa chance effect, the second big prize opening 2006 is set for a predetermined time (in this example, 0.00. It is configured to execute the short-time release control once to make the game ball open for 6 seconds), but after the main character achieves Yarenso, the player can also win a prize ball The opening / closing mode (opening time, opening / closing frequency, opening / closing interval, etc.) of the second big prize opening 2006 in the bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the second grand prize opening 2006 may be controlled to be opened a plurality of times for a short time in each round after the 9th round, or a predetermined number of second grand prize winning openings 2006 may be provided in each round after the 9th round. You may make it perform release control only once for the time and interval which can accept (for example, five) game balls.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned example, it is configured such that the main character performs the effect that the main character achieves the Yarenso only when the second special lottery result becomes “16R probable big hit 3”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the Yarenso chance effect can be executed even when another big hit that executes the 16R jackpot game is executed, so that the main character When the player achieves the eight consecutive villas, the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened / closed by one of a plurality of opening / closing patterns having a different number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player as a bonus. May be. In addition, in the case where the second consecutive winning prize opening 2006 becomes a plurality of big hits with different numbers of times of opening control in each round after the ninth round, the eight consecutive villa chance effect can be executed. When starting a mansion chance or starting a full bonus (during the interval from the end of the 8th round to the start of the 9th round), it suggests the number of times the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be released for a short time during each full round, etc. An effect may be executed. In this case, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player increases as the number of times the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be released for a short time in each round of the bonus is increased. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by paying attention to the production to be performed.

  Moreover, you may make it change the production content of Yarenso chance production according to a 2nd special lottery result, for example, when the total score in the mahjong game in Yarenso chance production is more than a predetermined score. If there is, the opening / closing pattern having a larger number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player than the case of less than this score may be executed. Specifically, when the second special lottery result is the “16R probability variation big hit”, the second special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 1 After running the mahjong game so that the main character gains more than 100,000 points by the 8th round of the jackpot game, the game will be super bonus. The two major winning holes 2006 are opened for a predetermined time (in this example, 29 seconds), or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are received in the second major winning hole 2006. An open / close pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is closed so that the game ball cannot be received for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example) is set to an open state that allows the game ball to be received until it is received. (Remaining 8 lounges On the other hand, if the second special lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit 3”, the eight consecutive villa chance production is executed, and the main character has gained 100,000 points by eight rounds of the big hit game After the mahjong game is executed so that it becomes less than the points, the second big prize opening 2006 is set in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined time (in this example, 0.6 seconds) as a normal bonus. The eight consecutive villa chance effect is executed by repeating an opening / closing pattern for making the game ball in an unacceptable closed state for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example) eight times (over the remaining eight rounds). If the number of points acquired by the main character is 100,000 or more, an opening / closing pattern in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player as a bonus is greater than when the score is less than 100,000 may be executed. .

  In the above example, the special round of the big hit game can be executed as a bonus only when the main character has executed the eight consecutive villa chance effect (after the eighth round). However, it is not limited to this, and a special round is also executed when the main character has finished the Yarenso Chance Production without going to the Yarenso (when the Yarenso Chance Production has ended in less than 8 rounds). You may make it obtain. In this case, the second big prize opening 2006 is set so that the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player is smaller than the bonus that can be obtained after the main character performs the eight consecutive villas. The opening / closing control may be performed. For example, when the second special lottery result is the “4R probable big hit”, the eight consecutive villa chance effect is executed and the second big prize opening 2006 is held for a predetermined time (until four rounds). In this example, it is left open for 29 seconds), or an opening that can accept game balls until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is received in the second big prize opening 2006. After entering the state, an opening / closing pattern for closing the second grand prize winning opening 2006 for a predetermined time (1.0 seconds in this example) to make the game ball unacceptable is executed to execute the main during the fourth round. That the character is resigned After finishing the eight-renso chance chance production, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds) and can be received for a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable in the closed state is executed 4 times (over the remaining 4 rounds) to execute the 8 consecutive villa chance effect, and the main character does not enter 8 consecutive 8 A special round that allows a maximum of one game ball to be entered per round may be executed when the eight consecutive villa chance production ends in a round less than the round.

  As described above, when the result of the second special lottery is “16R probable big hit 3”, the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time until the 8th round is executed. 10 games balls can enter the second grand prize opening 2006, and after the 9th round, the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, so that a maximum of two game balls can be entered per round. It is designed to be able to enter the two big prize opening 2006. The short-time opening control of the second grand prize opening 2006 executed after the ninth round is not performed in accordance with the timing at which the ball is launched by the ball launcher 680, but is controlled at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the timing of game ball driving is shifted, it becomes difficult for two game balls to enter the second big prize opening 2006 per round. On the other hand, after at least 8 rounds of the big hit game are started (until the game balls accepted in the second big prize opening 2006 are fired in the 16th round), the ball launcher 680 intermittently enters the second attacker passage 2543a. When game balls are continuously being struck, it is possible to enter two game balls in the second grand prize opening 2006 with a very high probability (about nine out of ten). Yes. In other words, if the result of the second special lottery is “16R probable big hit 3”, is the game ball fired once after the 8 rounds of the big hit game have been started, and restarted with the start of the 9th round? Or, compared to the case where the game ball is fired with a launch strength that cannot be driven into the second attacker passage 2543a, at least after eight rounds of the big hit game are started (the game balls that are received in the second big prize opening 2006 in the 16th round) In the case where the game ball is continuously driven into the second attacker passage 2543a (the number of prize balls acquired is also increased). In this way, since the degree of advantage increases when the game ball is continuously driven into the second attacker passage 2543a, the player can win the prize ball fairly without being influenced by the skill (skill level) of the player. It is possible to obtain the effect that the decline in the operation rate can be suppressed from the game store side.

  In addition, in the mahjong game that is executed in each round of the above-mentioned Yarenso chance production, when the main character is finished, the jackpot game is continued until the next round without ending the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of completion modes with different numbers of rounds may be provided in which the big hit game is surely continued when the main character is finished. For example, depending on the result of the second special lottery, a reconciliation mode indicating that it can continue to the next round (for example, up to 4 if this time is 3 rounds) and the next next round (for example, if this time is 3 rounds) Any one of the reconciliation modes indicating that it can continue up to 5 rounds) may be executed by lottery or the like. As a result, it is possible to focus on the production result of the eight consecutive villa chance production, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, a jackpot game of four rounds or more is always executed in the jackpot that executes the eight-rencho chance production, so in the mahjong game in the eight-rencho chance production, the main character is always finished until the third round. The effect that continues the big hit game is executed. In this way, in the round where the jackpot game always continues regardless of the type of jackpot, as the production result of the eight consecutive villa chance production, it continues until the upper limit round (four rounds in this example) where the jackpot game always continues regardless of the type of jackpot You may make it display the production result which shows doing. As a result, regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to watch the Yarenso chance production with peace of mind until a round in which the jackpot game always continues is executed. Also, until the upper limit round (4 rounds in this example) where the big hit game is always continued, the effect of whether or not the big hit game is continued for each round is not executed, and the upper round where the big hit game is always continued (this In the example, a series of effects may be executed over 4 rounds), so that an effect as to whether or not to continue to the next round from the upper limit round that the big hit game continues may be executed.

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to the priority display, but the maximum eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are put on hold are displayed in the order in which the hold is generated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine of a type that starts with (the order in which start winnings are given to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening part 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 2500 Center part 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3100 Backward behind movable production unit 3110 Backside lower first decorative body (first decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3111 First decorative surface 3112 Second decorative surface 3114 Sub liquid crystal display device (production display device, decorative member, decorative unit)
3115 1st hinge part 3120 2nd decorative body behind back (2nd decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3121 First decorative surface 3122 Second decorative surface 3124 Second hinge portion 3125 Decorative body support shaft (support shaft, decorative unit)
3126 Second decorative body side operation gear (axis under gear, decoration unit)
3127 Bearing member 3130 Rotation drive unit 3131 Rotation drive unit base 3131a Main part 3131b Sub part 3131c Upper bearing part 3131d Lower bearing part 3132 Rotation transmission member 3132a Sleeve part 3132b Connection part 3132c First decorative body side operation gear (axial gear)
3133 First drive gear (upper drive gear)
3134 1st drive motor behind back (upper drive motor, drive motor)
3136 Second drive gear (lower drive gear)
3137 Second drive motor behind back (lower drive motor, drive motor)
3142 unit cover 3143 rack member 3143a rack gear 3150 slide unit 3151 unit base 3152 slide guide 3153 transmission gear member 3154 drive gear 3155 rear back third drive motor 3157 slide cover

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising launching means capable of launching a game ball and controlling to a special gaming state in which a privilege is given to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined winning condition,
Opening / closing means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball launched by the launching means during the special game state can be received and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received;
Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the opening and closing means;
Even if the opening / closing means is controlled to be in the open state for an extremely short time, a profit generating means that makes it possible to acquire more game balls than the total number of game balls fired by the firing means, A gaming machine characterized by comprising.